1. business and industrial
2. construction

November 07, 2013
FOR CONSTRUCTION
PROJECT NO. 13063
PROJECT MANUAL
Williamsburg Retail 1
Shell Building Construction
at
2731 FM 1463 Road & South Firethorne Road
Katy, Texas 77479
Owner:
FT 1463, LTD
ONE RIVERWAY, SUITE 1870
HOUSTON, TX 77056
PH (713) 832-2402
Architect:
HEIGHTS VENTURE ARCHITECTS, L.L.P.
1111 NORTH LOOP WEST, SUITE 800
HOUSTON, TX 77008
PH (713) 869-1103
Civil Engineer:
JONES & CARTER INC
6335 Gulfton, Suite 100
HOUSTON, TX 77081
PH (713) 777-5377
Structural Engineer:
PSS PARTNERSHIP
1177 West Loop South, Suite 940
HOUSTON, TX 77027
PH (713) 782-1040
Plumbing/Electrical Engineer:
ADVANCED TECHNOLOGIES INCORPORATED
13105 NW FRWY., SUITE 690
HOUSTON, TX 77040
PH (713) 896-6990
Landscape Designer:
EVERGREEN DESIGN GROUP, INC.
2500 CITY WEST BLVD, STE 300
HOUSTON, TX 77042
PH (800) 680-6830
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 000110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 00 -- PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
000110 - Table of Contents
002113 - Instructions to Bidders
003100 - Information Available to Bidders
004100 - Bid Form
004336 - Proposed Subcontractors Form
004373 - Proposed Schedule of Values Form
006110 - Contractor's Affidavit and Partial Release
006160 - Contractor's General Warranty
006190 - Asbestos-Free Warranty
007200 - General Conditions
007300 - Supplementary Conditions
SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 01 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 - Summary
12657 - Pricing of Construction Contract Change Orders
013000 - Administrative Requirements
013216 - Construction Progress Schedule
014000 - Quality Requirements
015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls
015100 - Temporary Utilities
015713 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control
016000 - Product Requirements
017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements
017800 - Closeout Submittals
DIVISION 02 -- EXISTING CONDITIONS
For Site Preparation and Earthwork, see Division 31
For Pavements and Site Improvements, see Division 32
For Site Utilities, see Division 33
DIVISION 03 -- CONCRETE
030505 - Underslab Vapor Barrier
031000 - Concrete Forms and Accessories
032000 - Concrete Reinforcing
033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete
033900 - Concrete Curing
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
000110 - 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Williamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
DIVISION 04 -- MASONRY
040511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting
042000 - Unit Masonry
044301 - Stone Masonry Veneer
047200 - Cast Stone Masonry
DIVISION 05 -- METALS
053100 - Steel Decking
054000 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing
055000 - Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 -- WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000 - Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 07 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071113 - Bituminous Dampproofing
071300 - Sheet Waterproofing
071410 - Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers
071900 - Water Repellents
072100 - Thermal Insulation
072400 - Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems
074113 - Metal Roof Panels
074213 - Metal Wall Panels
075350 - Modified Bitumen Roofing
076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
077123 - Manufactured Gutters and Downspouts
077200 - Roof Accessories
079005 - Joint Sealers
DIVISION 08 -- OPENINGS
081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
083100 - Access Doors and Panels
084313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts
087100 - Door Hardware
088000 - Glazing
DIVISION 09 -- FINISHES
092236.23 - Metal Lath
092400 - Portland Cement Plastering
099000 - Painting and Coating
DIVISION 21 -- FIRE SUPPRESSION RE PLANS
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
000110 - 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Williamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
DIVISION 22 -- PLUMBING RE PLANS
DIVISION 23 -- HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) RE PLANS
DIVISION 26 -- ELECTRICAL RE PLANS
DIVISION 31 -- EARTHWORK
312200 - Grading
312316 - Excavation
312316.13 - Trenching
312323 - Fill
313213.19 - Lime Soil Stabilization
316329 - Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts
DIVISION 32 -- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321313 - Concrete Paving
321713 - Parking Bumpers
321723.13 - Painted Pavement Markings
321726 - Tactile Warning Surfacing
328423 - Underground Sprinklers
329223 - Sodding
329300 – Plants
DIVISION 33 -- UTILITIES
330513 - Manholes and Structures
331116 - Site Water Utility Distribution Piping
331300 - Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution
333111 - Site Sanitary Utility Sewerage Piping
334111 - Site Storm Utility Drainage Piping
335111 - Site Natural-Gas Distribution
337119 - Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes
337900 - Site Grounding
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
000110 - 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 002113
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INVITATION
1.01 BID SUBMISSION
A.
Bids signed and under seal, executed, and dated will be received at the office of the FT 1463
Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises and Architects before 2:00 p.m. local standard time on the 10th
day December.
1. Owner: FT 1463 Ltd, - Carter Perrin
a. email: [email protected]
b. One Riverway, Suite 1870, Houston, TX 77056
2. Architect:Heights Venture Architects LLP, Michael Kravetz - Project Architect
a. Fax: 713-869-5573
b. email: [email protected]
c. 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800, Houston, TX 77008
B.
Offers submitted after the above time shall may not be considered.
C.
Submit required Supplements To Bid Forms within 24 hours after closing time for receiving bids.
D.
Amendments to the submitted offer will be permitted if received in writing prior to bid closing and
if endorsed by the same party or parties who signed and sealed the offer.
1.02 INTENT
A.
The intent of this Bid request is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete Williamsburg
Retail 1 located at 2731 FM 1463, Katy, TX 77479 for a Stipulated Sum contract, in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
1.03 WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Work of this proposed Contract comprises building construction and site development, including
general construction Work.
1.04 CONTRACT TIME
A.
Perform the Work in 150 calendar days or less. The bidder may suggest a revision to the
Contract Time with a specific adjustment to the Bid Amount.
B.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises requires that under the work of this contract be
completed as quickly as possible and consideration will be given to time of completion when
reviewing the submitted bids.
BID DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
2.01 DEFINITIONS
A.
Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Invitation To Bid, Instructions to
Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Bid Form Supplements To Bid Forms and
Appendices identified.
B.
Contract Documents: Defined in AIA A201 Article 1 including issued Addenda.
C.
Bid, Offer, or Bidding: Act of submitting an offer under seal.
D.
Bid Amount: Monetary sum identified by the Bidder in the Bid Form.
2.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS IDENTIFICATION
A.
The Contract Documents are identified as Project Number 13063, as prepared by Architect who
is located at 1111 North Loop West, Suite 800, Houston, Texas, 77008, and with contents as
identified in the Table of Contents.
2.03 AVAILABILITY
A.
Bid documents may be obtained at the General Contractors costs via the pdf link provided
https://www.box.com/s/291f5901c07dde7a4b3c
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
002113 - 1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
B.
For Construction
09-24-13
Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project.
Their use does not grant a license for other purposes.
2.04 INQUIRIES / ADDENDA
A.
Direct questions to Michael Kravetz, [email protected], telephone direct desk at
281-854-6106.
B.
Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All Addenda become part of the Contract
Documents. Include resultant costs in the Bid Amount.
C.
Verbal answers are not binding on any party.
D.
Clarifications requested by bidders must be in writing not less than 2 days before date set for
receipt of bids. The reply will be in the form of an Addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded
to known recipients .
2.05 PRODUCT/ASSEMBLY/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS
A.
Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product, substitutions will be considered up to 3
days before receipt of bids.
B.
When a request to substitute a product is made, Architect may approve the substitution and will
issue an Addendum to known bidders.
C.
The submission shall provide sufficient information to determine acceptability of such products.
D.
Provide complete information on required revisions to other work to accommodate each
proposed substitution.
E.
Provide products as specified unless substitutions are submitted in this manner and accepted.
SITE ASSESSMENT
3.01 SITE EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the project site before submitting a bid.
B.
The site is accessible without access approval, and has no fence enclosure.
3.02 PREBID CONFERENCE
A.
If a pre-bid conference is scheduled All general contract bidders and suppliers are invited and
the meeting will be held at the offices of the Architect. At this time no pre-bid meeting is
intended.
B.
Summarized minutes of this meeting will be circulated to attendees. These minutes will not
form part of the Contract Documents.
QUALIFICATIONS
4.01 EVIDENCE OF QUALIFICATIONS
A.
To demonstrate qualification for performing the Work of this Contract, bidders may be
requested to submit written evidence of financial position, license to perform work in the State
and /or any other pertainant requested documentaion .
4.02 SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS/OTHERS
A.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises reserves the right to reject a proposed subcontractor
for reasonable cause.
BID SUBMISSION
5.01 SUBMISSION PROCEDURE
A.
Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time
prescribed, by E-mail to the Owner and Architect. And.
B.
Submit one copy of the executed offer on the Bid Forms provided, signed and sealed with the
required security in a closed opaque envelope, clearly identified with bidder's name, project
name and FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's name on the outside. Postmarked or
delivery dated to coincide with bids due.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
002113 - 2
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
5.02 BID INELIGIBILITY
A.
Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain
arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, may at the discretion of the
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises, be declared unacceptable.
B.
Bids are by invitation, only from selected bidders. Bids from unsolicited bidders may be
returned.
BID ENCLOSURES/REQUIREMENTS
6.01 PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE
A.
Accepted Bidder: Provide a Performance and Payment bond as described in Document
007300 - Supplementary Conditions.
B.
Include the cost of performance assurance bonds in the Bid Amount and identify the cost on the
Bid Form.
6.02 INSURANCE
A.
Provide an executed "Undertaking of Insurance" on the form provided stating their intention to
provide insurance to the bidder in accordance with the insurance requirements of the Contract
Documents.
6.03 BID FORM REQUIREMENTS
A.
Complete all requested information in the Bid Form and Appendices.
B.
Taxes: Refer to Document 007300 - Supplementary Conditions for inclusion of taxes,
procedures for tax rebate claims, products that are tax exempt, and _____.
6.04 SALES AND USE TAXES
6.05 FEES FOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
Include the fees for overhead and profit on own Work and Work by subcontractors, identified in
Document 007300 - Supplementary Conditions.
B.
Include in the Bid Form, the overhead and profit fees on own Work and Work by
subcontractors, applicable for Changes in the Work, whether additions to or deductions from
the Work on which the Bid Amount is based.
C.
Include in the Bid Form, the fees proposed for subcontract work for changes (both additions and
deductions) in the Work. Contractor shall apply fees as noted, to the subcontractor's gross (net
plus fee) costs on additional work.
6.06 BID FORM SIGNATURE
A.
The Bid Form shall be signed by the bidder, as follows:
1. Sole Proprietorship: Signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also
sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Affix seal.
2. Partnership: Signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign.
Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Affix seal to each signature.
3. Corporation: Signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures.
Insert the officer's capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix
the corporate seal. If the bid is signed by officials other than the president and secretary of
the company, or the president/secretary/treasurer of the company, a copy of the by-law
resolution of their board of directors authorizing them to do so, must also be submitted with
the Bid Form in the bid envelope.
4. Joint Venture: Each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid Form under their
respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the
requirements of a Partnership.
6.07 ADDITIONAL BID INFORMATION
A.
Submit the following Supplements 24 hours after bid submission:
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
002113 - 3
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
2.
For Construction
09-24-13
Document 004336 - Subcontractors: Include the names of all proposed Subcontractors
and the portions of the Work they will perform.
Document 004373 - Proposed Schedule of Values identifies the Bid Amount segmented
into portions as requested.
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION
7.01 DURATION OF OFFER
A.
Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of thirty (30) days
after the bid closing date.
7.02 ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER
A.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers.
END OF INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
002113 - 4
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 003100
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
EXISTING REPORTS
1.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT
A.
A copy of the geotechnical reports with respect to the building site is included with this
document:
1. Williamsburg Retail Building
a. Title: Geotechnical Engineering Report,
b. Project Number: 92135387
c. Date: October 30, 2013
d. Prepared by: Terracon Consultants, Inc
B.
The recommendations described shall not be construed as a requirement of this Contract,
unless specifically referenced in the Contract Documents.
C.
This report, by its nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface
conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, changes in the design and
construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the Contract
Price accruing to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
1.02 TDLR REGISTRATION CONFIRMATION PAGE
A.
A copy of the Texas Department of licensing and Regulation, registration confirmation page is
included with this document:
B.
Dated 09-18-13
C.
Confirmation number: EABPRJ B4803921
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
003100 - 1
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 004100
BID FORM
THE PROJECT AND THE PARTIES
1.01 TO:
A.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises
1.02 FOR:
A.
Williamsburg Retail 1
1.03 DATE: ______________ (BIDDER TO ENTER DATE)
1.04 SUBMITTED BY: (BIDDER TO ENTER NAME AND ADDRESS)
A.
Bidder's Full Name _________________________
1. Address _________________________
2. City, State, Zip_________________________
1.05 BIDDERS LICENSE NUMBER: _____________________
1.06 OFFER
A.
Having examined the Place of The Work, Construction Documents, and all matters referred to
in the Instructions to Bidders and the Contract Documents prepared by ________ for the above
mentioned project, we, the undersigned, hereby offer to enter into a Contract to perform the
Work for the Sum of:
B.
_________________________________________________________
_________________________________________________________ dollars
($______________________), in lawful money of the United States of America.
C.
All applicable federal taxes are included and State of Texas taxes are included in the Bid Sum.
1.07 ACCEPTANCE
A.
This offer shall be open to acceptance and is irrevocable for sixty days from the bid closing
date.
B.
If this bid is accepted by FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises within the time period stated
above, we will:
1. Execute the Agreement within seven days of receipt of Notice of Award.
2. Furnish the required bonds within seven days of receipt of Notice of Award.
a. A performance bond issued from the General Contractor to Satya Inc in the amount
equal to the bid amount.
3. Commence work within seven days after written Notice to Proceed of this bid. It is
expected that the start date to be approximately January 6, 2014
1.08 CONTRACT TIME
A.
If this Bid is accepted, we will:
B.
Complete the Work in 150 calendar days from Notice to Proceed. Notice to Proceed is
expected to be in or near June 1, 2014.
1.09 UNIT PRICES
A.
The following are Unit Prices for specific portions of the Work as listed. The following is the list
of Unit Prices:
1. 3'-0" x 7'-0" rear hollow metal door and frame, if added before tilt panels are poured._____
2. 3'-0" x 7'-0" rear hollow metal door and frame, if sawcut into panel after panels have been
raised._____
3. 3'-0" x 7'-0" storefront door and frame, includes modification of standard storefront to
accomadate door._____
4. Compacted Fill from Off-Site - Per Cubic Yard _____
5. A typical roof vent penetration conforming with the roof warranty requirements _____.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
004100 - 1
BID FORM
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
6.
7.
For Construction
09-24-13
A typical exhaust hood penetration (opening less than 12" x 12") conforming with the roof
warranty requirements._____.
A typical 10 ton RTU curb installation, and underdeck associated framing as per shell
structural plans and conforming with the roof warranty requirements_____.
1.10 ALTERNATES
A.
The following Alternates for specific portions of the Work as listed.
1. Alternate # 1
a. All work associated with the west driveway on South Firethorne Road.
2. Alternate # 2
a. Any value engineering design recomendation related to roofing alternates.
3. Alternate # 3
a. Any offer of expedited construction schedule.
4. Alternate # 4
a. The proposed per diem liquidated damages amount (if any) for exceeding the contract
time of 150 days.
1.11 ADDENDA
A.
The following Addenda have been received. The modifications to the Bid Documents noted
below have been considered and all costs are included in the Bid Sum.
1. Addendum # _______ Dated ________________.
2. Addendum # _______ Dated ________________.
1.12 BID FORM SUPPLEMENTS
A.
We agree to submit the following Supplements to Bid Forms within 24 of the submission of this
bid for additional bid information:
1. Document 004336 - Subcontractors: Include the names of all proposed Subcontractors
and the portions of the Work they will perform.
2. Document 004373 - Proposed Schedule of Values identifies the Bid Price/Sum segmented
into portions as requested in specific categories.
a. Provide this document by e-mail in excell format so the Owners may copy data
without rewriting it, into a bid comparison form.
1.13 BID FORM SIGNATURE(S)
A.
The Corporate Seal of
B.
C.
____________________________________________
D.
was hereunto affixed in the presence of:
E.
F.
____________________________________________
G.
(Authorized signing officer, Title)
H.
I.
(Seal)
J.
K.
____________________________________________
END OF BID FORM
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
004100 - 2
BID FORM
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 004336
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM
PARTICULARS
1.01 HEREWITH IS THE LIST OF THE PROPOSEDSUBCONTRACTORS REFERENCED IN THE BID
SUBMITTED BY (BIDDDER) :
1.02 (BIDDER) _______________________________________________
1.03 TO (OWNER) ................................
1.04 DATED ___________________ AND WHICH IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE BID FORM.
1.05 THE FOLLOWING WORK IS INTENDED TO BE PERFORMED (OR PROVIDED) BY
SUBCONTRACTORS AND COORDINATED BY US:
LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS
2.01 WORK SUBJECT................SUBCONTRACTOR NAME
A.
Concrete
________________________
B.
Steel fabrication
C.
Steel erection
________________________
D.
Roofing
________________________
E.
Plumbing
________________________
F.
Electrical
________________________
G.
Waterproofing
________________________
H.
Eifs / Painting Finishes
________________________
I.
Masonry
________________________
J.
Glazing
________________________
END OF SUPPLEMENT A
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
004336 - 1
PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 004373
PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM
PARTICULARS
1.01 THE FOLLOWING IS A COST BREAKDOWN REFERENCED IN THE BID SUBMITTED BY:
1.02 (BIDDER) ________________________________
1.03 TO (OWNER) ................................
1.04 DATED ____________ AND WHICH IS AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE BID FORM.
GENERAL CONDITIONS
___________
CONCRETE PIERS AND FOUNDATIONS
___________
CONCRETE SITE PAVING AND SIDEWALKS
___________
CONCRETE TILT PANELS
___________
STEEL
___________
THIN VENEER MASONRY
___________
CMU MASONRY- DUMPSTER
___________
METALS (FRAMING AND SHEATHING)
___________
SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
___________
ROOFING
___________
ELECTRICAL
___________
PLUMBING
___________
SEALANTS AND WATERPROOFING
___________
EIFS AND PAINTING
___________
GLAZING & STOREFRONTS
___________
METAL DOORS
___________
DUMPSTER GATES
___________
END OF SUPPLEMENT E
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
004373 - 1
PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 006110
CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL RELEASE
OF
1.01 CLAIMS AND LIENS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT
1.02 STATE OF _____________________
1.03 COUNTY OF ____________________
1.04 I, ______________________________, BEING DULY SWORN, STATE ON PERSONAL
KNOWLEDGE THAT I AM ____________________________ (TITLE) OF
__________________________________ (CONTRACTOR) AND HAVE AUTHORITY TO
EXECUTE THIS AFFIDAVIT ON BEHALF OF THE CONTRACTOR. I FURTHER STATE THE
FOLLOWING:
1.05 ALL THE LABORERS, PERSONS, FIRMS AND CORPORATIONS HAVING FURNISHED
SERVICES OR MATERIALS FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF WILLIAMSBURG RETAIL 1, HAVE
BEEN PAID IN FULL FOR LABOR AND MATERIALS FURNISHED TO DATE, EXCEPT
RETENTION AND UNFOUNDED CHANGE ORDERS, AND THAT UPON COMPLETION OF THE
WORK OF EACH SUBCONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER, THE CONTRACTOR WILL CAUSE EACH
SUCH SUBCONTRACTOR AND SUPPLIER TO EXECUTE A RELEASE AND WAIVER OF
CLAIM IN THE FORM REQUIRED BY THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SHALL FURTHER
CAUSE EACH SUCH SUBCONTRACTOR AND SUPPLIER TO CANCEL ANY LIENS (IF ANY)
THAT MAY HAVE BEEN FILED AGAINST THE PROJECT.
1.06 THE WORK COVERED BY THIS PAYMENT HAS BEEN COMPLETED IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
1.07 IN CONSIDERATION OF THE PARTIAL PAYMENT OF $________________, THE
CONTRACTOR HEREBY RELEASES FT 1463 LTD., FROM ALL LIEN RIGHTS, CLAIMS, OR
DEMANDS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WHICH IT NOW HAS AGAINST THE
CONSTRUCTION OF THE PROJECT ARISING OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE
FURNISHING OF LABOR AND MATERIALS ON OR BEFORE THE DATE OF THIS AFFIDAVIT,
EXCEPT FOR RETAINAGE AND UNFUNDED CHANGE ORDERS.
1.08 TO THE BEST OF THE CONTRACTOR’S KNOWLEDGE AND BELIEF, NO CLAIMS OR CLAIM
OF LIENS EXIST BY OR AGAINST ANY SUBCONTRACTOR OR SUPPLIER WHO FURNISHED
MATERIALS OR LABOR ON THE PROJECT, AND IF ANY APPEAR AFTERWARDS THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL HOLD FT 1463 LTD., HARMLESS ON THE ACCOUNT THEREOF.
CONTRACTOR AGREES TO PROVIDE A LIEN REMOVAL BOND AT NO COST TO THE
OWNER OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES WITHIN 15 DAYS FROM REQUEST BY THE OWNER OR
THE OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVES.
1.09 IF ANY LIEN REMAINS UNSATISFIED AFTER ALL PAYMENTS ARE MADE, THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL REFUND TO THE OWNER ALL MONIES THAT THE LATTER MAY BE
COMPELLED TO PAY IN DISCHARGING SUCH LIEN, PLUS ALL LIEN BONDS, COSTS,
INTERESTS, BOTH PREJUDGMENT AT A LEGAL RATE.
A.
(Contractor)
B.
By: _______________________________________
1.10 SWORN TO AND SUBSCRIBED BEFORE ME
1.11 THIS _____ DAY OF ______________, 20__.
1.12 ____________________________________ MY COMMISSION EXPIRES:
______________________
1.13 NOTARY PUBLIC
1.14 (SEAL)
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
RELEASE
006110 - 1
CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 006160
CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL WARRANTY
THE UNDERSIGNED CONTRACTOR HEREBY WARRANTS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE
APPLICABLE PROVISIONS AND TERMS SET FORTH IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, ALL
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP INCORPORATED FOR THE WILLIAMSBURG RETAIL 1,
AGAINST ANY AND ALL DEFECTS DUE TO FAULTY MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP OR
NEGLIGENCE FOR A PERIOD OF 12 MONTHS AFTER DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ON
AIA FROM G704, OR SUCH LONGER PERIODS AS SET FORTH IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,
FROM THE EFFECTIVE DATE OF THIS WARRANTY.
1.01 THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE BINDING WHERE DEFECTS OCCUR DUE TO NORMAL USAGE
CONDITIONS AND DOES NOT COVER WILLFUL OR MALICIOUS DAMAGE, DAMAGES
CAUSED BY ACTS OF GOD OR OTHER CASUALTY BEYOND THE CONTROL OF THE
CONTRACTOR.
1.02 THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE IN ADDITION TO OTHER WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES SET
FORTH IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, AND SHALL NOT ACT TO CONSTITUTE A WAIVER
OF ADDITIONAL PROTECTION OF THE OWNER AFFORDED, WHERE APPLICABLE, BY
CONSUMER PROTECTION AND PRODUCT LIABILITY PROVISIONS OF LAW, AND THESE
STIPULATIONS SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE WAIVER OF ANY ADDITIONAL RIGHTS OR
REMEDIES AVAILABLE TO THE OWNER UNDER THE LAW.
1.03 SIGNED:
________________________________________________
1.04 ________________________________________________
1.05 TITLE:
________________________________________________
1.06 ________________________________________________
1.07 (CORPORATE SEAL)
1.08 SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME THIS
1.09 ______ DAY OF ______________, 20___.
1.10 ___________________________________
1.11 (NOTARY PUBLIC)
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
006160 - 1
CONTRACTOR’S GENERAL WARRANTY
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 006190
ASBESTOS-FREE WARRANTY
THE UNDERSIGNED CONTRACTOR HEREBY WARRANTS THAT NO ASBESTOS-CONTAINING
MATERIALS OF ANY KIND WERE USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF WILLAMSBURG RETAIL 1
BUILDING
1.01 SIGNED:
________________________________________________
1.02 ________________________________________________
1.03 TITLE:
________________________________________________
1.04 ________________________________________________
1.05 (CORPORATE SEAL)
1.06 SUBSCRIBED AND SWORN BEFORE ME THIS
1.07 ______ DAY OF ______________, 20___.
1.08 ___________________________________
1.09 (NOTARY PUBLIC)
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
006190 - 1
ASBESTOS-FREE WARRANTY
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 007200
GENERAL CONDITIONS
FORM OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
1.01 THE GENERAL CONDITIONS APPLICABLE TO THIS CONTRACT IS ATTACHED FOLLOWING
THIS PAGE.
RELATED REQUIREMENTS
2.01 SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS.
2.02 AIA DOCUMENT A201, GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION,
2007 EDITION, IS THE GENERAL CONDITIONS BETWEEN THE OWNER AND CONTRACTOR.
A.
See attached AIA document A201 General Conditions, Draft. Attached to this section.
2.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
2.04 REFER TO DOCUMENT 007300 FOR AMENDMENTS TO THESE GENERAL CONDITIONS.
END OF DOCUMENT
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
007200 - 1
GENERAL CONDITIONS
®
TM
AIA Document A201 – 2007
General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
for the following PROJECT:
(Name and location or address)
test
THE OWNER:
(Name and address)
THE ARCHITECT:
(Name and address)
TABLE OF ARTICLES
1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
2
OWNER
3
CONTRACTOR
4
ARCHITECT
5
SUBCONTRACTORS
6
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
7
CHANGES IN THE WORK
8
TIME
9
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
10
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
11
INSURANCE AND BONDS
12
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
13
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
14
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
15
CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS:
The author of this document
has added information
needed for its completion.
The author may also have
revised the text of the
original AIA standard form.
An Additions and Deletions
Report that notes added
information as well as
revisions to the standard
form text is available from
the author and should be
reviewed.
This document has important
legal consequences.
Consultation with an
attorney is encouraged with
respect to its completion
or modification.
ELECTRONIC COPYING of any
portion of this AIA® Document
to another electronic file is
prohibited and constitutes a
violation of copyright laws
as set forth in the footer of
this document.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
1
INDEX
(Numbers and Topics in Bold are Section Headings)
Acceptance of Nonconforming Work
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Acceptance of Work
9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3
Access to Work
3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1
Accident Prevention
10
Acts and Omissions
3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5,
10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7.1, 14.1, 15.2
Addenda
1.1.1, 3.11.1
Additional Costs, Claims for
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4
Additional Inspections and Testing
9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5
Additional Insured
11.1.4
Additional Time, Claims for
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5
Administration of the Contract
3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid
1.1.1
Aesthetic Effect
4.2.13
Allowances
3.8, 7.3.8
All-risk Insurance
11.3.1, 11.3.1.1
Applications for Payment
4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.10,
11.1.3
Approvals
2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10,
4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1
Arbitration
8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.3.2, 15.4
ARCHITECT
4
Architect, Definition of
4.1.1
Architect, Extent of Authority
2.4.1, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3.1, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4,
9.2.1, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1,
12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1
Architect, Limitations of Authority and
Responsibility
2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2,
4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4.1,
9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2
Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses
2.4.1, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4
Architect’s Administration of the Contract
3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5
Architect’s Approvals
2.4.1, 3.1.3, 3.5.1, 3.10.2, 4.2.7
Architect’s Authority to Reject Work
3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1
Architect’s Copyright
1.1.7, 1.5
Architect’s Decisions
3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14,
6.3.1, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2.1, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4,
9.9.1, 13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3
Architect’s Inspections
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Architect’s Instructions
3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2
Architect’s Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12
Architect’s Project Representative
4.2.10
Architect’s Relationship with Contractor
1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1,
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18,
4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5,
9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5,
15.2
Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7
Architect’s Representations
9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1
Architect’s Site Visits
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Asbestos
10.3.1
Attorneys’ Fees
3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3
Award of Separate Contracts
6.1.1, 6.1.2
Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for
Portions of the Work
5.2
Basic Definitions
1.1
Bidding Requirements
1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1
Binding Dispute Resolution
9.7.1, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1,
15.3.2, 15.4.1
Boiler and Machinery Insurance
11.3.2
Bonds, Lien
7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Bonds, Performance, and Payment
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
2
Building Permit
3.7.1
Capitalization
1.3
Certificate of Substantial Completion
9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5
Certificates for Payment
4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1,
9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3
Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval
13.5.4
Certificates of Insurance
9.10.2, 11.1.3
Change Orders
1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8,
5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10,
8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9,
12.1.2, 15.1.3
Change Orders, Definition of
7.2.1
CHANGES IN THE WORK
2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 7.4.1, 8.3.1,
9.3.1.1, 11.3.9
Claims, Definition of
15.1.1
CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3.1, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15,
15.4
Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims
15.4.1
Claims for Additional Cost
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4
Claims for Additional Time
3.2.4, 3.7.46.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5
Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for
3.7.4
Claims for Damages
3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1,
11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Claims Subject to Arbitration
15.3.1, 15.4.1
Cleaning Up
3.15, 6.3
Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to
2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3,
6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1,
15.1.4
Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2
Communications Facilitating Contract
Administration
3.9.1, 4.2.4
Completion, Conditions Relating to
3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1,
9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2
COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND
9
Completion, Substantial
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
12.2, 13.7
Compliance with Laws
1.6.1, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4,
10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6,
14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3
Concealed or Unknown Conditions
3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3
Conditions of the Contract
1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4
Consent, Written
3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1,
9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
Consolidation or Joinder
15.4.4
CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY
SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
1.1.4, 6
Construction Change Directive, Definition of
7.3.1
Construction Change Directives
1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3,
9.3.1.1
Construction Schedules, Contractor’s
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts
5.4, 14.2.2.2
Continuing Contract Performance
15.1.3
Contract, Definition of
1.1.2
CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR
SUSPENSION OF THE
5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14
Contract Administration
3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5
Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating
to
3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1
Contract Documents, The
1.1.1
Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of
1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3
Contract Documents, Definition of
1.1.1
Contract Sum
3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4,
9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4,
15.2.5
Contract Sum, Definition of
9.1
Contract Time
3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4,
8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7.1, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2,
15.1.5.1, 15.2.5
Contract Time, Definition of
8.1.1
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
3
CONTRACTOR
3
Contractor, Definition of
3.1, 6.1.2
Contractor’s Construction Schedules
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Contractor’s Employees
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3,
11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1,
Contractor’s Liability Insurance
11.1
Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors
and Owner’s Forces
3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4
Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2,
11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8
Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect
1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1,
3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2,
6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6,
10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1
Contractor’s Representations
3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2
Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the
Work
3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8
Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents
3.2
Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work
9.7
Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract
14.1, 15.1.6
Contractor’s Submittals
3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2,
9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2
Contractor’s Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Contractor’s Supervision and Construction
Procedures
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3
Contractual Liability Insurance
11.1.1.8, 11.2
Coordination and Correlation
1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1
Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications
1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11
Copyrights
1.5, 3.17
Correction of Work
2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2
Cost, Definition of
7.3.7
Costs
2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3,
7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6,
11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14
Cutting and Patching
3.14, 6.2.5
Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate
Contractors
3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3,
12.2.4
Damage to the Work
3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4.1, 11.3.1, 12.2.4
Damages, Claims for
3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1,
11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Damages for Delay
6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2
Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of
8.1.2
Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of
8.1.3
Day, Definition of
8.1.4
Decisions of the Architect
3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3,
7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2.1, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1,
13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2
Decisions to Withhold Certification
9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3
Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance,
Rejection and Correction of
2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6,
9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1
Defective Work, Definition of
3.5.1
Definitions
1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1,
15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1
Delays and Extensions of Time
3.2., 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1,
10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Disputes
6.3.1, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2
Documents and Samples at the Site
3.11
Drawings, Definition of
1.1.5
Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of
3.11
Effective Date of Insurance
8.2.2, 11.1.2
Emergencies
10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4
Employees, Contractor’s
3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2,
10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
4
Equipment, Labor, Materials or
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13.1,
3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3,
9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Execution and Progress of the Work
1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5.1,
3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2,
9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3
Extensions of Time
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4.1, 9.5.1, 9.7.1,
10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Failure of Payment
9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2
Faulty Work
(See Defective or Nonconforming Work)
Final Completion and Final Payment
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5,
12.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Financial Arrangements, Owner’s
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4
Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance
11.3.1.1
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1
Governing Law
13.1
Guarantees (See Warranty)
Hazardous Materials
10.2.4, 10.3
Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers
5.2.1
Indemnification
3.17.1, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2,
11.3.7
Information and Services Required of the Owner
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5,
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1,
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Initial Decision
15.2
Initial Decision Maker, Definition of
1.1.8
Initial Decision Maker, Decisions
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5
Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority
14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4,
15.2.5
Injury or Damage to Person or Property
10.2.8, 10.4.1
Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3,
9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5
Instructions to Bidders
1.1.1
Instructions to the Contractor
3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2
Instruments of Service, Definition of
1.1.7
Insurance
3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11
Insurance, Boiler and Machinery
11.3.2
Insurance, Contractor’s Liability
11.1
Insurance, Effective Date of
8.2.2, 11.1.2
Insurance, Loss of Use
11.3.3
Insurance, Owner’s Liability
11.2
Insurance, Property
10.2.5, 11.3
Insurance, Stored Materials
9.3.2, 11.4.1.4
INSURANCE AND BONDS
11
Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy
9.9.1, 11.4.1.5
Insurance Companies, Settlement with
11.4.10
Intent of the Contract Documents
1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4
Interest
13.6
Interpretation
1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1
Interpretations, Written
4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4
Judgment on Final Award
15.4.2
Labor and Materials, Equipment
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1,
4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3,
9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2
Labor Disputes
8.3.1
Laws and Regulations
1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13.1, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,
10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2,
13.6.1, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4
Liens
2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8
Limitations, Statutes of
12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1
Limitations of Liability
2.3.1, 3.2.2, 3.5.1, 3.12.10, 3.17.1, 3.18.1, 4.2.6,
4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3,
11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2
Limitations of Time
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7,
5.2, 5.3.1, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2.1, 9.3.1,
9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7.1, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3,
11.3.1.5, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15
Loss of Use Insurance
11.3.3
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
5
Material Suppliers
1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5
Materials, Hazardous
10.2.4, 10.3
Materials, Labor, Equipment and
1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5.1, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12,
3.13.1, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2,
9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1,
14.2.1.2
Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and
Procedures of Construction
3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2
Mechanic’s Lien
2.1.2, 15.2.8
Mediation
8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3,
15.4.1
Minor Changes in the Work
1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4
MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
13
Modifications, Definition of
1.1.1
Modifications to the Contract
1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7.1,
10.3.2, 11.3.1
Mutual Responsibility
6.2
Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of
9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3
Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of
2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5.1, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3,
9.10.4, 12.2.1
Notice
2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1,
9.7.1, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3,
13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1
Notice, Written
2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7.1,
9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14,
15.2.8, 15.4.1
Notice of Claims
3.7.4, 4.5, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4
Notice of Testing and Inspections
13.5.1, 13.5.2
Observations, Contractor’s
3.2, 3.7.4
Occupancy
2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5
Orders, Written
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1,
13.5.2, 14.3.1
OWNER
2
Owner, Definition of
2.1.1
Owner, Information and Services Required of the
2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2,
9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1,
13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Owner’s Authority
1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2,
4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3.1,
7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4,
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2,
12.3.1, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7
Owner’s Financial Capability
2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4
Owner’s Liability Insurance
11.2
Owner’s Loss of Use Insurance
11.3.3
Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors
1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2
Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work
2.4, 14.2.2
Owner’s Right to Clean Up
6.3
Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to
Award Separate Contracts
6.1
Owner’s Right to Stop the Work
2.3
Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work
14.3
Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract
14.2
Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications
and Other Instruments of Service
1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11.1, 3.17.1,
4.2.12, 5.3.1
Partial Occupancy or Use
9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5
Patching, Cutting and
3.14, 6.2.5
Patents
3.17
Payment, Applications for
4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2.1, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7.1, 9.8.5,
9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Payment, Certificates for
4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7.1, 9.10.1,
9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4
Payment, Failure of
9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2
Payment, Final
4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 11.4.5,
12.3.1, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3
Payment Bond, Performance Bond and
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.4
Payments, Progress
9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3
PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
6
Payments to Subcontractors
5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 11.4.8,
14.2.1.2
PCB
10.3.1
Performance Bond and Payment Bond
7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4.9, 11.4
Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws
2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2
PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION
OF
10
Polychlorinated Biphenyl
10.3.1
Product Data, Definition of
3.12.2
Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Progress and Completion
4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3
Progress Payments
9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3
Project, Definition of the
1.1.4
Project Representatives
4.2.10
Property Insurance
10.2.5, 11.3
PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10
Regulations and Laws
1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1,
10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14,
15.2.8, 15.4
Rejection of Work
3.5.1, 4.2.6, 12.2.1
Releases and Waivers of Liens
9.10.2
Representations
3.2.1, 3.5.1, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1,
9.8.2, 9.10.1
Representatives
2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1,
5.1.2, 13.2.1
Responsibility for Those Performing the Work
3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10
Retainage
9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3
Review of Contract Documents and Field
Conditions by Contractor
3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3
Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and
Architect
3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2
Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and
Samples by Contractor
3.12
Rights and Remedies
1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 4.5, 5.3, 5.4,
6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2,
12.2.4, 13.4, 14, 15.4
Royalties, Patents and Copyrights
3.17
Rules and Notices for Arbitration
15.4.1
Safety of Persons and Property
10.2, 10.4
Safety Precautions and Programs
3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4
Samples, Definition of
3.12.3
Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Samples at the Site, Documents and
3.11
Schedule of Values
9.2, 9.3.1
Schedules, Construction
3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2
Separate Contracts and Contractors
1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 11.4.7,
12.1.2
Shop Drawings, Definition of
3.12.1
Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples
3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7
Site, Use of
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Site Inspections
3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Site Visits, Architect’s
3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5
Special Inspections and Testing
4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5
Specifications, Definition of the
1.1.6
Specifications, The
1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14
Statute of Limitations
13.7, 15.4.1.1
Stopping the Work
2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1
Stored Materials
6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 11.4.1.4
Subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.1
SUBCONTRACTORS
5
Subcontractors, Work by
1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2,
9.6.7
Subcontractual Relations
5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 11.4.7, 11.4.8,
14.1, 14.2.1
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
7
Submittals
3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3,
9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3
Submittal Schedule
3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7
Subrogation, Waivers of
6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.3.7
Substantial Completion
4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3,
12.2, 13.7
Substantial Completion, Definition of
9.8.1
Substitution of Subcontractors
5.2.3, 5.2.4
Substitution of Architect
4.1.3
Substitutions of Materials
3.4.2, 3.5.1, 7.3.8
Sub-subcontractor, Definition of
5.1.2
Subsurface Conditions
3.7.4
Successors and Assigns
13.2
Superintendent
3.9, 10.2.6
Supervision and Construction Procedures
1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4,
7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3
Surety
5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7
Surety, Consent of
9.10.2, 9.10.3
Surveys
2.2.3
Suspension by the Owner for Convenience
14.3
Suspension of the Work
5.4.2, 14.3
Suspension or Termination of the Contract
5.4.1.1, 11.4.9, 14
Taxes
3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4
Termination by the Contractor
14.1, 15.1.6
Termination by the Owner for Cause
5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6
Termination by the Owner for Convenience
14.4
Termination of the Architect
4.1.3
Termination of the Contractor
14.2.2
TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE
CONTRACT
14
Tests and Inspections
3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2,
9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5
TIME
8
Time, Delays and Extensions of
3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7.1,
10.3.2, 10.4.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5
Time Limits
2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2,
4.4, 4.5, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1,
9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3,
11.4.1.5, 11.4.6, 11.4.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15.1.2,
15.4
Time Limits on Claims
3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2
Title to Work
9.3.2, 9.3.3
Transmission of Data in Digital Form
1.6
UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF
WORK
12
Uncovering of Work
12.1
Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown
3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3
Unit Prices
7.3.3.2, 7.3.4
Use of Documents
1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3
Use of Site
3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1
Values, Schedule of
9.2, 9.3.1
Waiver of Claims by the Architect
13.4.2
Waiver of Claims by the Contractor
9.10.5, 11.4.7, 13.4.2, 15.1.6
Waiver of Claims by the Owner
9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 11.4.3, 11.4.5, 11.4.7, 12.2.2.1,
13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6
Waiver of Consequential Damages
14.2.4, 15.1.6
Waiver of Liens
9.10.2, 9.10.4
Waivers of Subrogation
6.1.1, 11.4.5, 11.3.7
Warranty
3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7.1
Weather Delays
15.1.5.2
Work, Definition of
1.1.3
Written Consent
1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5,
9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
8
Written Interpretations
4.2.11, 4.2.12
Written Notice
2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7,
9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.6, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3,
14, 15.4.1
Written Orders
1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 11.4.9, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2,
14.3.1, 15.1.2
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
9
ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS
§ 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS
§ 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the
Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other
Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in
the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment
to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written
order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the
Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms,
other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or
proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements.
§ 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT
The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated
agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written
or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be
construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the
Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner
and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the
Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the
Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties.
§ 1.1.3 THE WORK
The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or
partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by
the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
§ 1.1.4 THE PROJECT
The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole
or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors.
§ 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS
The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and
dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams.
§ 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS
The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials,
equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.
§ 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the
tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their
respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies,
surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials.
§ 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER
The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in
accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2.
§ 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
§ 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and
completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by
one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent
consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the
indicated results.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
10
§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not
control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be
performed by any trade.
§ 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction
industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings.
§ 1.3 CAPITALIZATION
Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of
numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects.
§ 1.4 INTERPRETATION
In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and
articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in
another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
§ 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE
§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective
Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and
other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or
equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to
meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as
publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights.
§ 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use
and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All
copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service.
The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the
Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the
specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants.
§ 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM
If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form,
they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already
provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 2 OWNER
§ 2.1 GENERAL
§ 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term “Owner” means
the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative.
§ 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information
necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such
information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located,
usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein.
§ 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER
§ 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide
reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the
Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the
Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3)
the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due.
The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or
the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not
materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
11
§ 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents,
including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements,
assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent
changes in existing facilities.
§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for
the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of
information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the
Work.
§ 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with
reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control
and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the
Contractor’s written request for such information or services.
§ 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of
the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2.
§ 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as
required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the
Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such
order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part
of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent
required by Section 6.1.3.
§ 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails
within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such
default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner
may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from
payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including
Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect
or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the
Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor
shall pay the difference to the Owner.
ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR
§ 3.1 GENERAL
§ 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the
Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the
jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have
express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term “Contractor” means
the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative.
§ 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests,
inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.
§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR
§ 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site,
become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal
observations with requirements of the Contract Documents.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
12
§ 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the
Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as
the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing
conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These
obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the
purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor
shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the
Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the
Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional,
unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
§ 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable
laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor
shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a
request for information in such form as the Architect may require.
§ 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the
Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or
3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations
of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been
avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the
Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or
omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract
Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules
and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities.
§ 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract
Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific
instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall
evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite
safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means,
methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the
Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from
the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely
responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences
or procedures.
§ 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees,
Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or
on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors.
§ 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that
such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
§ 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS
§ 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,
materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other
facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent
and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
§ 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections
3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the
Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
13
§ 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other
persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly
skilled in tasks assigned to them.
§ 3.5 WARRANTY
The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will
be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further
warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects,
except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or
equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes
remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or
insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the
Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment.
§ 3.6 TAXES
The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are
legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled
to go into effect.
§ 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES, AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building
permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper
execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally
required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded.
§ 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.
§ 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility
for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction.
§ 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1)
subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract
Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily
found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the
Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions
are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly
investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or
decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an
equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions
at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the
terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the
reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as
provided in Article 15.
§ 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial
markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately
suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such
notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume
the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but
shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the
Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in
Article 15.
§ 3.8 ALLOWANCES
§ 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items
covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct,
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
14
but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable
objection.
§ 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,
.1
allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and
all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;
.2
Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and
other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but
not in the allowances; and
.3
whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly
by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual
costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section
3.8.2.2.
§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness.
§ 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT
§ 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance
at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and
communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
§ 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner
through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14
days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the
proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply
within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
§ 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent,
which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed.
§ 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and
Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits
current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the
Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall
provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work.
§ 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter
as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval.
The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be
coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review
submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase
in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals.
§ 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to
the Owner and Architect.
§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE
The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change
Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made
during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required
submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the
Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
15
§ 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
§ 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the
Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of
the Work.
§ 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and
other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work.
§ 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards
by which the Work will be judged.
§ 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is
to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design
concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents
require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals
upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents.
Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.
§ 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the
Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in
accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal
schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of
the Owner or of separate contractors.
§ 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to
the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified
materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and
coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract
Documents.
§ 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal
and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been
approved by the Architect.
§ 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of
responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect
in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific
deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued
authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof.
§ 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the
absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions.
§ 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of
architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of
the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s
responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be
required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or
certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the
Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria
that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a
properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations,
specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings
and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear
such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
16
to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or
provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all
performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will
review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor
shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract
Documents.
§ 3.13 USE OF SITE
The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably
encumber the site with materials or equipment.
§ 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING
§ 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make
its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition
existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents.
§ 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed
construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by
excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor
except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably
withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s
consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
§ 3.15 CLEANING UP
§ 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or
rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste
materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about
the Project.
§ 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner
shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor.
§ 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK
The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever
located.
§ 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement
of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but
shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular
manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are
contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the
Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a
patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the
Architect.
§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION
§ 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,
Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages,
losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the
Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death,
or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the
negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or
anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is
caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
17
other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section
3.18.
§ 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor,
a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the
indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages,
compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’ compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT
§ 4.1 GENERAL
§ 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing
architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the
Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number.
§ 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents
shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect.
Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld.
§ 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom
the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the
Architect.
§ 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
§ 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be
an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate For Payment.
The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract
Documents.
§ 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed
with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed,
and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when
fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to
make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will
not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or
procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the
Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1.
§ 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and
quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract
Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and
deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the
Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or
charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or
employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.
§ 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION
Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially
authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about
matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be
through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the
Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner.
§ 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review
and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts.
§ 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the
Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
18
Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed.
However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to
exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors,
material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the
Work.
§ 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals
such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance
with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be
taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved
submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professional
judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the
accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for
installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as
required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the
Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval
of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods,
techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an
assembly of which the item is a component.
§ 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minor
changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and
recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4.
§ 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date
of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the
Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and
assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section
9.10.
§ 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in
carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of
such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents.
§ 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the
Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests
will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness.
§ 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable
from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations
and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not
show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith.
§ 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent
expressed in the Contract Documents.
§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The
Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with
reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and
Specifications in response to the requests for information.
ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS
§ 5.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the
Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in
number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor”
does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
19
§ 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to
perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract
Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subsubcontractor.
§ 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK
§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as
practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of
persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in
writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or
entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within
the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
§ 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made
reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the
Contractor has made reasonable objection.
§ 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but
rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall
be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order
shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract
Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively
in submitting names as required.
§ 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or
Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution.
§ 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS
By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each
Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by
terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities,
including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents,
assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the
Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor
so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically
provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the
Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the
Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The
Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement,
copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the
Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may
be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of
such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
§ 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS
§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided
that
.1
assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to
Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the
Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and
.2
assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the
Contract.
When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and
obligations under the subcontract.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
20
§ 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s
compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension.
§ 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a
successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity,
the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the
subcontract.
ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS
§ 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
§ 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s
own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or
operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those
portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is
involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15.
§ 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations
on the site, the term “Contractor” in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes
each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
§ 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate
contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with
other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any
revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction
schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until
subsequently revised.
§ 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations
related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations
and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without
excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12.
§ 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY
§ 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the
Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents.
§ 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by
the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly
report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable
for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that
the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the
Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.
§ 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor
because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be
responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly
timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.
§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially
completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5.
§ 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are
described for the Contractor in Section 3.14.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
21
§ 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their
respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the
Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible.
ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK
§ 7.1 GENERAL
§ 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the
Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the
limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
§ 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction
Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the
Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone.
§ 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the
Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive
or order for a minor change in the Work.
§ 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS
§ 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and
Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:
.1
The change in the Work;
.2
The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and
.3
The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time.
§ 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
§ 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and
Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract
Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes
in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the
Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly.
§ 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change
Order.
§ 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be
based on one of the following methods:
.1
Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to
permit evaluation;
.2
Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
.3
Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or
percentage fee; or
.4
As provided in Section 7.3.7.
§ 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally
contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that
application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or
Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted.
§ 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in
the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any,
provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or
Contract Time.
§ 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith,
including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall
be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
22
§ 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum,
the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of
those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an
amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a
reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form
as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following:
.1
Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits
required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;
.2
Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or
consumed;
.3
Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the
Contractor or others;
.4
Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to
the Work; and
.5
Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change.
§ 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a
net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and
credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall
be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
§ 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor
may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment.
The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs
and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be
reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis
as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15.
§ 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the
adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such
agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be
issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive.
§ 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or
extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be
effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.
ARTICLE 8 TIME
§ 8.1 DEFINITIONS
§ 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in
the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work.
§ 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement.
§ 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8.
§ 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically
defined.
§ 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
§ 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement
the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work.
§ 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely
commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
23
furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the
effective date of such insurance.
§ 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion
within the Contract Time.
§ 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
§ 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of
the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by
changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other
causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or
by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change
Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine.
§ 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15.
§ 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of
the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
§ 9.1 CONTRACT SUM
The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by
the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
§ 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the
various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as
the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing
the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
§ 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
§ 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the
Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under
Section 9.2., for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by
such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of
requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract
Documents.
§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in
the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the
Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders.
§ 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the
Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by
others whom the Contractor intends to pay.
§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and
equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance
by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location
agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon
compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such
materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable
insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site.
§ 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner
no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for
Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
24
Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims,
security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or
entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work.
§ 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
§ 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue
to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines
is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding
certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1.
§ 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner,
based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the
best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that
the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to
an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of
subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion
and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further
constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance
of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques,
sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers
and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to
ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum.
§ 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION
§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary
to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot
be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the
Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised
amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to
make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of
subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to
such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor
is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of
.1
defective Work not remedied;
.2
third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless
security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;
.3
failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or
equipment;
.4
reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;
.5
damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;
.6
reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the
unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay;
or
.7
repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts
previously withheld.
§ 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option,
issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the
Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the
Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such
payment on the next Certificate for Payment.
§ 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
§ 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and
within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
25
§ 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the
Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to
the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate
agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar
manner.
§ 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of
completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on
account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
§ 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid
Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted
Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact
Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an
obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law.
§ 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided
in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.
§ 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the
Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum,
payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by
the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under
contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require
money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any
fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity
to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision.
§ 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT
If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after
receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days
after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding
dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect,
stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended
appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents.
§ 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof
is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the
Work for its intended use.
§ 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept
separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of
items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the
responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
§ 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or
designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not
included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so
that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor
shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification
by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to
determine Substantial Completion.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
26
§ 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a
Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish
responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and
insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the
Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion
of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion.
§ 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written
acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if
any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment
shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
§ 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when
such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented
to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the
Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided
the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments,
retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in
writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract
Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and
submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use
shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement
between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.
§ 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect
the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the
Work.
§ 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not
constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance
and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the
Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect
will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information
and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in
accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the
Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will
constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being
entitled to final payment have been fulfilled.
§ 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits
to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected
with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts
withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the
Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed
to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the
Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by
the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data
establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security
interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the
Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a
bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after
payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in
discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
27
§ 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault
of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the
Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the
Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the
remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract
Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that
portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to
certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment,
except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
§ 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from
.1
liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;
.2
failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
.3
terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.
§ 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a
waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at
the time of final Application for Payment.
ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS
The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs
in connection with the performance of the Contract.
§ 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to
.1
employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
.2
the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the
site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors; and
.3
other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements,
roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course
of construction.
§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes,
rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their
protection from damage, injury or loss.
§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract,
reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards,
promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities.
§ 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are
necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under
supervision of properly qualified personnel.
§ 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property
insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in
whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed
by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under
Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or
anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable,
and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in
addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
28
§ 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty
shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise
designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.
§ 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or
create an unsafe condition.
§ 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY
If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of
others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not
insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice
shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter.
§ 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
§ 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents
regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the
Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death
to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl
(PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately
stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
§ 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory
to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such
material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications
of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or
who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the
Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the
persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity
proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no
reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall
resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be
extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable
additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up.
§ 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor,
Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against
claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from
performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or
death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
(other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence
of the party seeking indemnity.
§ 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings
to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be
responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s
fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances.
§ 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of
a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to
perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s
fault or negligence.
§ 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for
the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
29
§ 10.4 EMERGENCIES
In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to
prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor
on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7.
ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS
§ 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
§ 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do
business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims
set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under
the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by
a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of
them may be liable:
.1
Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that
are applicable to the Work to be performed;
.2
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the
Contractor’s employees;
.3
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than
the Contractor’s employees;
.4
Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;
.5
Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible
property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;
.6
Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of
ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
.7
Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and
.8
Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under
Section 3.18.
§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the
Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an
occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the
Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment,
and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction
of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract
Documents.
§ 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of
the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the
insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies
will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An
additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations,
shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal
or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning
reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be
furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness.
§ 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include
(1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s Consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in
part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an
additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the
Contractor’s completed operations.
§ 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE
The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance.
§ 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE
§ 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfully
authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
30
risk “all-risk” or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract
Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at
the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained,
unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who
are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person
or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered,
whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Subsubcontractors in the Project.
§ 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an “all-risk” or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation,
insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without
duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework,
testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any
applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services
and expenses required as a result of such insured loss.
§ 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of
the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to
commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof
shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or
maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all
reasonable costs properly attributable thereto.
§ 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such
deductibles.
§ 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work
in transit.
§ 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company
or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or
otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or
companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that
would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.
§ 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE
The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by
law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner;
this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work,
and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds.
§ 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE
The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss
of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action
against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other
hazards however caused.
§ 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other
special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such
insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order.
§ 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent
to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment
property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring
the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section
11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate
policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
31
§ 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that
includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable
conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision
that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’
prior written notice has been given to the Contractor.
§ 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION
The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate
contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees,
for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to
this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of
such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the
Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, subsubcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of
subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even
though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay
the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the
property damaged.
§ 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made
payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any
applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of
insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for
validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.
§ 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss,
give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against
proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the
Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in
accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and
Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for
convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change
in the Work in accordance with Article 7.
§ 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in
interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such
objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method
of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method
of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute
over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators.
§ 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
§ 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of
the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically
required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract.
§ 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment
of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall
authorize a copy to be furnished.
ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
§ 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK
§ 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically
expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the
Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
32
§ 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior
to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such
Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate
Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such
costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or
a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs.
§ 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK
§ 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of
the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated,
installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost
of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary
thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
§ 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of
Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties
established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents,
any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor
shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously
given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after
discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the
Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require
correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct
nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or
Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4.
§ 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first
performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual
completion of that portion of the Work.
§ 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the
Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2.
§ 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the
requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner.
§ 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or
partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work
that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to
other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for
correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct
the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents
may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the
Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work.
§ 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK
If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the
Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as
appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
33
ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
§ 13.1 GOVERNING LAW
The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have
selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section
15.4.
§ 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
§ 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legal
representatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided
in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the
other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain
legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract.
§ 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction
financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment.
§ 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the
firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or
certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party
giving notice.
§ 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
§ 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder
shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available
by law.
§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty
afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a
breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.
§ 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
§ 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract
Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public
authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and
approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public
authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect
timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such
procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until
after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or
applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor.
§ 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require
additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written
authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection
or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of
when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such
costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense.
§ 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the
portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary
by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses
shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
§ 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract
Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
34
§ 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the
Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.
§ 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid
unreasonable delay in the Work.
§ 13.6 INTEREST
Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate
as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at
the place where the Project is located.
§ 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS
The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of
warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements
of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law,
but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and
Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7.
ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT
§ 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR
§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days
through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any
other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for
any of the following reasons:
.1
Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to
be stopped;
.2
An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be
stopped;
.3
Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of
the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not
made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or
.4
The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable
evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.
§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor,
Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work
under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work
by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of
days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less.
§ 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’
written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work
executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages.
§ 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a
Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract
with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract
Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional
days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided
in Section 14.1.3.
§ 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE
§ 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor
.1
repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;
.2
fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective
agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;
.3
repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful
orders of a public authority; or
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
35
.4
otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents.
§ 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that
sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and
after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of
the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:
.1
Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and
construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
.2
Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and
.3
Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written
request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs
incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.
§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall
not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
§ 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for
the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not
expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance,
the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case
may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall
survive termination of the Contract.
§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§ 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in
whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine.
§ 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by
suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include
profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent
.1
that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause
for which the Contractor is responsible; or
.2
that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract.
§ 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE
§ 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause.
§ 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the
Contractor shall
.1
cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;
.2
take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work;
and
.3
except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the
notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts
and purchase orders.
§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment
for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on
the Work not executed.
ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
§ 15.1 CLAIMS
§ 15.1.1 DEFINITION
A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other
relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in
question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to
substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
36
§ 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS
Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial
Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker.
Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or
within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later.
§ 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE
Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article
14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make
payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue
Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker.
§ 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST
If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall
be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency
endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4.
§ 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME
§ 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided
herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on
progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.
§ 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be
documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have
been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction.
§ 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to
this Contract. This mutual waiver includes
.1
damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing,
business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of
such persons; and
.2
damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of
personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit
except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.
This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination
in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of
liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
§ 15.2 INITIAL DECISION
§ 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial
Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise
indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be
required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30
days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been
rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide
disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner.
§ 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or
more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting
data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise,
or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker
lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the
Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the
Claim.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
37
§ 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek
information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial
Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of
such persons at the Owner’s expense.
§ 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional
supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a
response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting
data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon
receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim
in whole or in part.
§ 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that
the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the
reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision
Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding
on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding
dispute resolution.
§ 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.
§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party
file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the
demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue
binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision.
§ 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if
any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner
may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy.
§ 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in
accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines.
§ 15.3 MEDIATION
§ 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those
waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent
to binding dispute resolution.
§ 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree
otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in
writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation.
The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event,
mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending
mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the
parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed
to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings.
§ 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the
place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in
mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4 ARBITRATION
§ 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any
Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually
agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction
Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing,
delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
38
party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on
which arbitration is permitted to be demanded.
§ 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for
mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based
on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a
written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of
legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim.
§ 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in
accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity
duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court
having jurisdiction thereof.
§ 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER
§ 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any
other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration
permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact,
and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s).
§ 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a
common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration,
provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an
additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question
not described in the written consent.
§ 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under
this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and
Contractor under this Agreement.
AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The
American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International
Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal
penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 11:03:39 on
07/06/2009 under Order No.1000383312_1 which expires on 1/6/2010, and is not for resale.
User Notes:
(970054913)
39
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 007300
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
THE FOLLOWING SUPPLEMENTS MODIFY, CHANGE, DELETE FROM OR ADD TO THE "GENERAL
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION," AIA DOCUMENT A201, 2007 EDITION.
WHERE ANY ARTICLE OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS IS MODIFIED OR ANY PARAGRAPH,
SUBPARAGRAPH OR CLAUSE THEREOF IS MODIFIED OR DELETED BY THESE
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, THE UNALTERED PROVISIONS OF THAT ARTICLE,
PARAGRAPH, SUBPARAGRAPH OR CLAUSE SHALL REMAIN IN EFFECT.
1.01 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.02 BASIC DEFINITIONS
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.1:
1. "Precedence of Contract Documents shall be in the following sequence:
2. Agreement (Between Owner and Contractor)
3. Addenda
4. Supplementary Conditions
5. General Conditions (AIA Document A201)
6. Constructions Documents comprised of Specifications and Related
a. Documents, and Working Drawings."
B.
Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.3:
1. "Provide" shall mean furnish, fabricate, erect, and completely install, including all
necessary labor and incidental materials, the referenced or described item complete in
place and ready for use or operation."
C.
Add the following to Subparagraph 1.1.5:
1. "Mechanical, Plumbing, Fire Protection and Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic only.
Actual work shall be installed in accordance with measurements obtained at job-site,
coordination with other trades as necessary, building code requirements, shop
drawing/submittal requirements, and Owner furnished equipment."
D.
Add the following Subparagraph 1.2.4:
1. "1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements govern the execution of the work of
all sections of the Specifications."
1.03 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR
1.04 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR.
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 3.2.2:
1. "The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for accuracy of measurements obtained at
the site. No extra compensation will be allowed because of differences between actual
measurements and dimensions indicated on the Drawings, nor for Contractor's failure to
coordinate work with actual field measurements."
B.
Modify Subparagraph 3.3.3 as follows:
1. "The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of work already performed
under this contract by the Contractor and/or his subcontractors to determine that such
portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent work."
1.05 LABOR AND MATERIALS.
A.
Add the following Subparagraph 3.4.4 to Paragraph 3.4:
1. "3.4.4 The Contractor shall keep the Architect informed as to the availability of all specified
materials, equipment and required labor and shall advise him promptly, in writing, of all
materials, equipment or labor that may not be obtainable for the purposes of the Contract,
whether due to conditions of the market or other limiting or governing factors."
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 3.5.1:
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
007300 - 1
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
For Construction
09-24-13
"The Contractor shall bear all expenses resulting from substitutions including the cost of
work in general, structural, plumbing, mechanical and electrical trades required due to the
substitution and the cost of any Architect's services made necessary by the substitution."
1.07 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES:
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 3.7.1:
1. "Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect original copies
of all required certificates of inspection."
1.08 SUPERINTENDENT:
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 3.9.1:
1. "Contractor's resident superintendent as approved by the Architect shall not be removed
from Project until Project punch list has been completed and Project accepted by Owner or
until Architect finds the superintendent unacceptable.
1.09 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES
A.
Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 3.10.1.1 to Subparagraph 3.10.1:
1. "3.10.1.1 At the time of submitting the Construction Progress Schedule to the Architect,
the Contractor shall also submit the anticipated amount of each monthly payment that will
become due in accordance with the Progress Schedule. No application for payment will be
approved until the Construction Progress Schedule has been received by the Architect."
B.
Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 3.10.2.1 to Subparagraph 3.10.2:
1. "3.10.2.1 The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect within 15 days after the
Notice To Proceed, a schedule of Shop Drawings and Submittals as required in the
Contract Documents. Schedule shall fix dates for submission, and the lead time for each
submittal as related to requirements for return receipt for submittal to expedite delivery of
material to maintain Progress Schedule. It is to be understood that this Schedule will be
subject to change from time to time in accordance with the progress of the work. All Shop
Drawings, Samples and Submittals for approval shall be completed within 45 days after
the Notice To Proceed."
C.
Add the following to Subparagraph 3.12.5:
1. "Shop drawings, product data, samples and other submittals shall be prepared and
submitted in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative
Requirements."
1.10 ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT
1.11 ARCHITECT
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 4.1.1:
1. "The Architect as referred to in these documents is Height Ventures Architects L.L.P.,
1111 North Loop West, Suite 800, Houston, Texas 77008. The term "Architect" shall
include the Architect's consultants and staff for all disciplines including civil, structural,
mechanical, plumbing, electrical, etc."
1.12 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 4.3.2:
1. "Any claim implemented by Change Order shall represent the entire claim for that event
and no additional claims shall be made by either party to the Contract after the claim has
been implemented by Change Order."
1.13 ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS
1.14 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK.
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 5.2.1:
1. "The listing required by this subparagraph shall be submitted to the Architect not later than
30 days from the date the Notice To Proceed. This list shall include the names of
manufacturers, suppliers, and installers proposed for each of the products, equipment, and
materials to be incorporated into the project.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
007300 - 2
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
For Construction
09-24-13
The Contractor shall furnish upon request adequate data on any named entity on the list in
order to permit the Architect and Owner to conduct a proper evaluation. Failure to object
to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the Contract
Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to such
requirements."
1.15 SUBCONTRACTURAL RELATIONS
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 5.3.1:
1. "The division of these specifications into sections is not intended to control the Contractor
in dividing the work among subcontractors nor to limit the scope of work performed by any
trade under a given section. The Architect will not undertake to settle any differences
between the Contractor and his Subcontractors as to inclusion of work or material items. It
shall be the Contractor's entire responsibility for the proper coordination and completion of
all the work described in these Specifications whether performed by the Contractor or
Subcontractors, if any."
1.16 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
1.17 CHANGE ORDERS
A.
Add the following Subparagraph 7.2.3 to Paragraph 7.2:
1. "7.2.3 A change order, when issued, shall be full compensation, or credit, for the extra
work included, omitted, or substituted. It shall show on its face, the adjustment in time for
completion of the project as a result of the change in the work. Each change order shall
include all costs related thereto, including all overhead, miscellaneous expenses, and
incidentals. The Contractor shall submit a written and itemized proposal for each Change
Order under consideration (Change Proposal Requests) within 21 days of receipt of a
pricing request. See Section 01 26 57 for specific requirements for change orders.”
1.18 ARTICLE 8 - TIME
1.19 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 8.2.1:
1. The time for completion of this Contract shall be in accordance with the time indicated in
the Contractor’s Bid Form.
2. Time is of the essence, and if the Contractor fails to complete the work within the
maximum time, the Owner will incur substantial damages, including but not limited to loss
of revenue resulting from the inability to utilize the completed Project.
3. If the progress or completion of the Work be delayed by any fault, neglect, act or failure to
act on the part of the Contractor or any one acting for or on behalf of the Contractor, then
the Contractor shall, in addition to all of the other obligations imposed by the Owner, work
such overtime or require the appropriate subcontractor to work overtime as may be
necessary to make up for all time lost and to avoid delay in the progress and completion of
the work.
4. For the purpose of this Article, subcontractors shall be deemed to be acting for an on
behalf of the Contractor."
1.20 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME.
A.
Revise to read as follows:
1. "8.3.1 In the event that either the Owner or the Contractor shall be delayed or hindered in
or prevented from performance of any act required herein by reason of unavoidable labor
dispute, failure of power, restrictive governmental laws and regulations, riots, insurrections,
war, fire, adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, other unavoidable
casualties or other reason of a like nature not the fault of the party delayed in performing
work or doing acts required under the Contract Documents, then performance of such acts
shall be excused for the period of the delay and the period for the performance of any such
acts shall be extended for an equivalent period. If the Owner, the Architect, or any
separate contractor employed by the Owner delays the Contractor, this shall be considered
an event of force majeure. However, in no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
007300 - 3
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For Construction
09-24-13
compensation for any force major delay other than the extension of the Project scheduled
described above.
8.3.2 The Contractor's claims, if any, for extension of time must be made in writing to the
Architect not more than five working days after the Contractor has notice of the delay.
Thereafter, the Contractor must provide full details and supporting documentation with
regard to the cause of the delay within 15 working days of the initial notice of the delay to
the Architect. If either the initial notice or the supporting documentation are not filed with
the Architect in writing within the time periods specified, the claim for delay shall be
waived. If the cause for the delay is a continuing one then only one claim is necessary.
The Contractor's supporting documentation to the Architect shall include and estimate of
the probable effect of the delay on the progress of the Work and the Project Schedule.
8.3.3 Contractor agrees that dates under this Contract will not be extended due to normal
inclement weather. For a time extension to be granted for abnormal, inclement weather:
a) Such weather must, in the opinion of the Architect, actually have an adverse effect upon
the progress of the Contractor's work which is of a critical nature and; b) in the opinion of
the Architect, the adverse effect must not be due to any fault or negligence of Contractor
and could not have been avoided by the Contractor through proper planning, coordination
and implementation of adequate weather protection necessary to allow the Work to be
continued without adverse effect upon labor production. Contractor agrees that the fact
that abnormal inclement weather may occur does not, to itself, justify any time extension
hereunder.
8.3.4 The Contractor agrees that the measure of abnormal inclement weather due to
precipitation or temperature during the period covered by this Contract shall be the number
of calendar days in excess of those shown in the weather data from NOAA, in which
precipitation exceed .10 inch (or in the case of snow or ice pellets, 1 inch or more) or the
highest temperature was ninety-eight (98) degrees F. or above.
8.3.5 No extension of time will be made for abnormal inclement weather after principal
portions of the Work are enclosed except for site work which critically affects the Contract
time or specific dates. For the purpose of this Paragraph, the term "enclosed" is defined to
mean when the Work is sufficiently closed in (exterior walls up and roof in place) so as to
permit any structure or major portion thereof which is part of the Work, to be adequately
heated so as to allow the various trades to perform their work. The Architect shall
determine when the structure is "enclosed" and shall issue, upon the request of the
Contractor, a letter certifying the date the Work became enclosed for the purpose hereof
and;
8.3.3 Notwithstanding any other provisions of the Contract, Contractor agrees as between
and among itself and the Owner, Architect, the General Contractor, and any other AE
Representative that the Contractor's right to receive an extension of time pursuant to the
provisions of this Paragraph shall be the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy with
regard to any the Work and the Contractor hereby waives and releases claims for
monetary damages arising out of or related to any such delay or interference, including but
not limited to, claims for delay damages, interference damages, impact damages,
acceleration damages and any other form of the time-related damages against the Owner
and the Design Professional except under the following circumstances.
8.3.4 Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Architect's interpretations
shall not give rise to a claim for an extension of time until 15 days after the Contractor's
written request for them and the failure of the Architect to provide the requested
interpretation within an additional ten working days."
1.21 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
1.22 SCHEDULE OF VALUES (AS PART OF APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT, NOT PER INITIAL
SCHEDULE OF VALUES)
A.
Add the following Sub-Subparagraphs 9.2.1.1, 9.2.1.2, and 9.2.1.3 to Subparagraph 9.2.1:
1. "9.2.1.1 In submitting the Schedule of Values, the Contractor shall be prepared to
substantiate any line items in the Schedule of Values that may be questioned by the
Architect. Items in question shall be substantiated by such data and may be required by
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
007300 - 4
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
3.
For Construction
09-24-13
the Architect to establish the reasonableness of the value assigned to the labor and/or
materials for that item.
9.2.1.2 At the time of submitting the Schedule of Values, the Contractor shall also submit
an estimate of the amount of each Request for Payment for the Owner's use in planning
cash flow for the Project. It is understood that actual amounts requested by the Requests
for Payment may not agree with this estimate."
9.2.1.3 The schedule of values shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01200."
1.23 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 9.3.1:
1. "Requests for Payment shall be submitted in 3 copies (unless otherwise directed) to the
Architect on AIA G702.
2. Unless otherwise agreed between the Owner and Contractor, the Contractor shall submit
his requests for payment not later than the twenty-fifth day of each month. Requests shall
be based on work performed during the period ending with the date of the request.
3. The Owner will make a partial payment to the Contractor based on Contractor's requests
duly certified and approved by the Architect by the twenty-fifth of the following month.
4. Until Substantial Completion, the Owner will pay ninety percent (90%) of the amount due
the Contractor on account of progress payments.
B.
Add the following to Subparagraph 9.3.2:
1. "In requesting payment for materials stored on or off the site, the Contractor shall submit
with his Application for Payment the following:
a. An itemized list of the stored material prepared in sufficient detail to identify the
materials and their value.
b. Evidence such as bills of sale or such other proof as may be requested by the Owner
or Architect to substantiate that the materials listed have been paid for by the
Contractor, or for materials stored at the site only, a notarized statement from the
materials supplier stating that the materials will become the property of the Owner
upon payment by the Owner to the Contractor.
2. For material stored off the site, the Contractor shall submit with his Application for
Payment the following:
a. Evidence that the materials are stored at the location previously agreed to in writing.
b. Evidence that the storage location is bonded.
c. Evidence that the materials are insured while in storage and while in transit to the site.
d. Evidence that transportation to the site will be provided.
3. No payment will be certified for material stored off the site until:
a. The storage location has been agreed upon in writing.
4. The materials may be reviewed in their storage location by the Architect. This inspection,
if performed, is an extra service for which the Owner shall pay the Architect and for which
the Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor."
1.24 PROGRESS PAYMENTS
A.
Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 9.6.2.1 to Subparagraph 9.6.2:
1. "9.6.2.1 The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner harmless from laborer's,
mechanic's and materialmen's liens upon the Owner's properties or the premises upon
which the work is located, arising out of the work performed or materials furnished by the
Contractor or any of his subcontractors or any material suppliers under the Contract."
B.
Add the following to Subparagraph 9.6.5
1. "The provisions of this Subparagraph do not apply to material suppliers who have
furnished materials for which the Contractor has requested payment and are in storage off
of the site or on the site with the exception of when a notarized statement has been
furnished as provided in 9.3.2.1.2 above. All such stored materials except as previously
stated are to be paid for prior to payment to the Contractor by the Owner."
1.25 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION:
A.
Add the following Subparagraph 9.8.1.1 to Subparagraph 9.8.1:
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
007300 - 5
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
For Construction
09-24-13
"9.8.1.1 Substantial Completion for this project is defined as the point at which the
stage/phase is 100% complete (including the completion of all systems checking and
balancing, all required inspections by the local building authority, including acceptance by
same), completion of all outstanding punch list items. The project area shall have been
cleaned to the point where the Owner may assume occupancy.
1.26 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 9.10.2:
1. "At the completion of the project prior to receiving final payment, the Contractor shall
furnish the Owner, through the Architect, properly signed and notarized waivers of lien
from all subcontractors employed and material suppliers furnishing materials for the
Project. Such waivers shall be submitted before final payment will be certified by the
Architect to the Owner. The final inspection by the Architect are one time occurrences for
each respective phase. If the Project does not pass final inspection due to no fault of the
Owner or Architect, the Contractor shall pay the Owner for expenses incurred as a result of
a return by the Architect for final inspections."
1.27 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE
1.28 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE
A.
Contractor shall purchase insurance as follows:
B.
Worker's Compensation insurance including Employer's liability to cover employee injuries or
disease compensable under Worker's Compensation statutes of states in which Work is
conducted under this contract; disability benefit laws, if any; or Federal compensation acts such
as U. S. Longshoremen or Harbor Worker's Maritime Employment, or Railroad Compensation
Act(s), if applicable. Self-insurance plans approved by regulatory authorities in state in which
Work on this Project is performed are acceptable.
C.
Contractor shall assure all subcontractors have worker's compensation coverage for their
employees. Supply a copy of all certificates to the Owner prior to commencement of work.
D.
The Owner is to be named as an additional insured to the General Contractor's policy for this
project.
E.
Comprehensive General Liability policy to cover bodily injury to persons other than employees
and for damage to tangible property, including loss of use thereof, including following
exposures:
1. All premises and operations.
2. Explosion, collapse and underground damage.
3. Contractor's protective coverage for independent contractors or subcontractors employed
by him.
4. Contractual liability as required by General Conditions, Paragraph 5.4.
5. Usual personal injury liability endorsement with no exclusions pertaining to employment.
6. Products and completed operations coverage.
F.
Comprehensive automobile liability policy to cover bodily injury and property damage arising out
of ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle, including owned, non-owned, and hire
vehicles. In light of standard policy provisions concerning (1) loading and unloading and (2)
definitions pertaining to motor vehicles licensed for road use versus unlicensed or self-propelled
construction equipment, it is strongly recommended that comprehensive general liability and
comprehensive auto liability be written by same insurance carrier, though not necessarily in one
policy.
G.
Contractor shall purchase for Owner, Owner's Protective Liability policy to protect Owner,
Engineer, their consultants, agents, employees and such public corporations in whose
jurisdiction Work is located for their contingent liability for work performed by Contractor and
subcontractor(s) under this Contract.
H.
Owner shall purchase Builders' Risk covering property of Project for full cost of replacement as
of time of any loss which shall include, as named insured, (1) Contractor, (2) all subcontractors,
(3) Owner and Architect/Engineer, as their respective interests may prove to be at time of loss,
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
007300 - 6
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
covering insurable property which is subject of this Contract, whether in place, stored at job site,
stored elsewhere, or in transit at risk of insured(s). Coverage shall be affected on "All Risk"
form including, but not limited to, perils of fire, wind, vandalism, collapse, theft, and earthquake,
with exclusions normal to cover. Contractor may arrange for such deductibles as it deems to be
within its ability to self-assume, but it will be held solely responsible for amount of such
deductible and for any coinsurance penalties. Any insured loss shall be adjusted with Owner
and Contractor and paid to Owner and Contractor as Trustee for other insured.
I.
Umbrella or Excess Liability: Owner or its representative may, for certain projects, require limits
higher than those stated under "Limits of Liability" below. Contractor is granted option of
arranging coverage under single policy for full limit required or by combination of underlying
policies with balance provided by Excess or Liability policy equal to total limit(s) requested.
Umbrella or excess policy wording shall be at least as broad as preliminary or underlying
policy(ies) and shall apply both to Contractor's general liability, to its automobile liability
insurance and employer's liability insurance.
J.
Limits of Liability: Required limits of liability for insurance coverage required above shall be not
less than following:
K.
Worker's Compensation:
1. Worker's Compensation
Statutory
2. Employers Liability
$500,000 Per Accident Bodily Injury by Accident
3. $500,000 Policy Aggregate Bodily Injury by Disease
4. $500,000 Per Accident Bodily Injury by Disease
L.
Comprehensive General Liability:
1. Coverage A - Bodily Injury & Property
2. Damage Liability
$1,000,000 Any One Occurrence Subject to Products Completed
Operations & General Aggregates
3. Fire Damage Liability $50,000 Any One Fire Subject to General Aggregate
4. Coverage B - Personal & Advertising
5. Injury Liability
$1,000,000 Any One Person Subject to General Aggregate
6. Coverage C - Medical Payments
$5,000 Any One Person Subject to General Aggregate
M. Aggregate Limits of Liability:
1. $2,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate
2. $2,000,000 General Aggregate
N.
Automobile:
1. Liability
O.
Builder's Risk-Installation Floater:
By Owner
P.
Umbrellas or Excess Liability:
$5,000,000
Q.
Other Requirements:
1. Owner reserves the right to request complete copies of policies if deemed necessary to
ascertain details of coverage not provided by certificates. Such policy copies shall be
"Originally Signed Copies", and so designated.
2. Qualifications of Insurers: In order to determine financial strength and reputation of
insurance carriers, all companies providing coverage required shall have financial rating
not lower than XII and policyholder's service rating no lower than A- as listed in A. M.
Best's Key Rating Guide, current edition. Companies with ratings lower than A-: XII will be
acceptable only upon written consent of Owner.
3. Subrogation Clause: Following subrogation clause (or similar wording) shall appear in all
policies of liability insurance, "Subrogation Clause": It is hereby stipulated that this
insurance shall not be invalidated should insured waive in writing prior to loss any or all
right of recovery against any party for loss related to work performed under this Contract.
R.
Add the following Sub-Subparagraph 11.1.3.1 to Subparagraph 11.1.3:
1. "11.1.3.1 The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certificates of Insurance herein
required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
$1,000,000 Per Accident Owned, Non-owned & Hired Autos
007300 - 7
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
coverage required by Subparagraph 11.1.1, 11.1.2 and 11.1.3. The form of the
Certificates shall be AIA Document G-715. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner
copies of any endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.
1.29 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
1.30 GOVERNING LAW
A.
Add the following to Subparagraph 13.1.1:
1. "In all operations under the Contract, the Contractor agrees that he will comply with
provisions of all State and Federal Laws (including OSHA) and all local ordinances which
may affect such operations."
END OF SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
007300 - 8
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 PROJECT
A.
Project Name: Williamsburg Retail 1.
B.
Owner's Name: FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
C.
Architect Name: HeightsVenture Architects LLP.
D.
The Project consists of the new construction of a freestanding retail shell building of 14,925 s.f.
and the associated 1.859 acre site improvements, including offsite paving and drives on the
adjacent 2 acre tract under the same plat..
1. The building is steel frame and concrete tilt-wall structure on concrete foundation. Front
fascia finishes are on a front stud framed wall, with other stud framing at columns ans
other select locations..
2. Roofing consists of modified granulated top sheet bitumen system.
3. Associated sitework includes; paving, sidewalks, landscape, irrigation, underground
utilities, dumpster enclosures, and site lighting.
1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION
A.
Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document
005200 - Agreement Form.
1.03 WORK BY OWNER
A.
Items noted NIC (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg
Enterprises before Substantial Completion. Some items include:
1. Monument signage (power to signage is part of this project scope).
2. Postal box.
1.04 OWNER OCCUPANCY
A.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial
Completion.
B.
Cooperate with FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises to minimize conflict and to facilitate FT
1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's operations.
C.
Schedule the Work to accommodate FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises occupancy.
1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES
A.
Provide access to and from site as required by law and by FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg
Enterprises:
1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open
during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily
altered.
2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
011000 - 1
SUMMARY
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 012657
PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CHANGE ORDERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL PROVISIONS
A.
The contract language contained in this Document will supplement and take precedence over
all other change order pricing contract provisions in the Contract Documents provided by either
the Owner, Construction Manager (Contractor), General Contractor (Contractor) and/or
Architect/ Engineer. It is understood that these contract provisions will govern the pricing and
administration of all change order proposals to be submitted by the Construction Manager
and/or the General Contractor and/or the Trade Contractors and/or the Subcontractors and/or
all other lower tier subcontractors (all referred to as “Contractor” in this Document). In the event
of a conflict between the other contract documents used for the project, the change order
pricing contract provisions in this Section 01265 shall govern.
B.
Contractor agrees that it will incorporate the provisions of this Document into all agreements
with lower tier Contractors. It is understood that these change order pricing provisions apply to
all types of contracts and/or subcontracts specifically including lump sum (or fixed price
contracts), unit price contracts, and/or cost plus contracts with or without a guaranteed
maximum. It is further understood that these change order provisions will apply to all methods
of change order pricing specifically including lump sum change order proposals, unit price
change order proposals, and cost plus change order proposals.
C.
Whenever change order proposals to adjust the contract price become necessary, the Owner
will have the right to select the method of pricing to be used by the Contractor in accordance
with the pricing provisions found in this Dcoument. The options will be (1) lump sum change
order proposals, (2) unit price change order proposal, or (3) cost plus change order proposal as
defined in the following provisions.
1.02 LUMP SUM CHANGE ORDER PROPSOALS
A.
The Contractor will submit a properly itemized Lump Sum Change Order Proposal covering the
additional work and/or the work to be deleted. This proposal will be itemized for the various
components of work and segregated by labor, material, and equipment in a detailed format
satisfactory to Owner. The Owner will require itemized change orders on all change order
proposals from the Contractor, subcontractors, and sub-subcontractors regardless of tier.
Details to be submitted will include detailed line item estimates showing detailed materials
quantity take-offs, material prices by item and related labor hour pricing information and
extensions (by line item or by drawing as applicable).
1.03 LABOR
A.
Estimated labor costs to be included for self-performed work shall be based on the actual cost
per hour paid by the Contractor for those workers or crews of workers who the Contractor
reasonably anticipates will perform the change order work. Estimated labor hours shall include
hours only for those workmen and working foremen directly involved in performing the change
order work. Supervision above the level of working foremen (such as general foremen,
superintendent, project manager, etc.) is considered to be included in the Markup Percentages
as outlined in paragraphs 1.6 and 1.7 of this Document. Note: No separate allowances for
warranty expense will be allowed as a direct cost of a change order. Costs attributed to
warranty expenses will be considered to be covered by the Markup Percentages as outlined in
paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 of this Document.
1.04 LABOR BURDEN
A.
Labor burden allowable in change orders shall be defined as employer’s net actual cost of
payroll taxes (FICA, Medicare, SUTA, FUTA), net actual cost for employer’s cost of union
benefits (or other usual and customary fringe benefits if the employees are not union
employees), and net actual cost to employer for workers’ compensation insurance taking into
consideration adjustments for experience modifiers, premium discounts, dividends, rebates,
expense constants, assigned risk pool costs, net cost reductions due to policies with
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
CHANGE ORDERS
012657 - 1
PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
deductibles for self-insured losses, assigned risk rebates, etc. Contractor shall reduce their
standard payroll tax percentages to properly reflect the effective cost reduction due to the
estimated impact of the annual maximum wages subject to payroll taxes. (An estimated
percentage for labor burden may be used for pricing change orders. However, the percentage
used for labor burden to price change orders will be examined at the conclusion of the project
and an adjustment to the approved change orders will be processed if it is determined that the
actual labor burden percentage should have been more or less than the estimated percentage
used.)
1.05 MATERIAL
A.
Estimated material change order costs shall reflect the Contractor’s reasonably anticipated net
actual cost for the purchase of the material needed for the change order work. Estimated
material costs shall reflect cost reductions available to the Contractor due to trade discounts,
free material credits, and/or volume rebates. “Cash” discounts (i.e., prompt payment discounts
of 2% or less) available on material purchased for change order work shall be credited to Owner
if the Contractor is provided Owner funds in time for Contractor to take advantage of any such
“cash” discounts. Price quotations from material suppliers must be itemized with unit prices for
each specific item to be purchased. “Lot pricing” quotations will not be considered sufficient
substantiating detail.
1.06 EQUIPMENT
A.
Allowable change order estimated costs may include appropriate amounts for rental of major
equipment specifically needed to perform the change order work (defined as tools and
equipment with an individual purchase cost of more than $500). For Contractor owned
equipment, the “bare” equipment rental rates allowed to be used for pricing change order
proposals shall be 75% of the monthly rate listed in the most current publication of The AED
Green Book divided by 176 to arrive at a maximum hourly rate to be applied to the hours the
equipment is used performing the change order work. Further, for Contractor owned equipment
the aggregate equipment rent changes for any single piece of equipment used in all change
order work shall be limited to 50% of the fair market value of the piece of equipment when the
first change order is priced involving usage of the price of equipment. Fuel necessary to
operate the equipment will be considered as a separate direct cost associated with the change
order work.
1.07 MAXIMUM MARKUP PERCENTAGE ALLOWABLE ON SELF-PERFORMED WORK
A.
With respect to pricing change orders, the maximum Markup Percentage Fee to be paid to any
Contractor (regardless of tier) on self-performed work shall be a single markup percentage
not-to-exceed (the following sliding scale of percentages) of the net direct cost of (1) direct labor
and allowable labor burden costs applicable to the change order or extra work; (2) the net cost
of material and installed equipment incorporated into the change or extra work; and (3) net
rental cost of major equipment and related fuel costs necessary to complete the change in the
Work. The following sliding scale will apply for the pricing of self-performed work portion of
each change order proposal request:
1. 15% on the first $25,000 of the change order direct cost of self-performed work,
2. 10% on the portion of the change order direct cost of self-performed work between
$25,000 and $50,000 and,
3. 7.5% on the portion of the change order direct cost of self-performed work between
$50,000 and $200,000 and,
4. 5% on the portion of the change order direct cost of self-performed work greater than
$200,000.
B.
The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be allocated 2/3 to cover
applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field overhead costs related to processing
and supervising the change order work, and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead
costs and profit.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
CHANGE ORDERS
012657 - 2
PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
1.08 MAXIMUM MARKUP PERCENTAGES ALLOWABLE ON WORK PERFORMED BY LOWER TIER
CONTRACTORS
A.
With respect to pricing the portion of change order proposals involving work performed by lower
tier contractors, the maximum Markup Percentage Fee allowable to the Contractor supervising
the lower tier contractor’s work shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the net of all approved
change order work performed by all subcontractors combined for any particular change order
proposal.
B.
The markup computed using the above formula shall be considered to be allocated 2/3 to cover
applicable overhead costs directly attributable to the field overhead costs related to processing
and supervising the change order work, and the remaining 1/3 to cover home office overhead
costs and profit.
1.09 NO MARKUP ON SALES AND USE TAX
A.
Sales and use tax (if applicable) shall not be subject to any Markup Percentage Fee. Any sales
or use tax properly payable by the Contractors shall be added after computing the change order
amount before tax.
1.10 DIRECT AND INDIRECT COSTS COVERED BY MARKUP PERCENTAGES
A.
As a further clarification, the agreed upon Markup Percentage Fee is intended to cover the
Contractor’s profit and all indirect costs associated with the change order work. Items intended
to be covered by the Markup Percentage Fee include, but are not limited to home expenses,
branch office and field office overhead expense of any kind; project management;
superintendents, general foremen; estimating, engineering; coordinating; expediting;
purchasing; detailing; legal, accounting, data processing or other administrative expenses; shop
drawings; permits; auto insurance and umbrella insurance; pick-up truck costs; and warranty
expense costs. The cost for the use of small tools is also to be considered covered by the
Markup Percentage Fee. Small tools shall be defined as tools and equipment (power or
non-power) with an individual purchase cost of less than $500.
1.11 DIRECT CHANGE ORDERS AND NET DEDUCT CHANGES
A.
The application of the markup percentages referenced in the preceding paragraphs 1.07 and
1.08 will apply to both additive and deductive change orders. In the case of a deductive change
order, the credit will be computed by applying the sliding scale percentages as outlined in
paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 so that a deductive change order would be computed in the same
manner as an additive change order. In those instances where a change involves both additive
and deductive work, the additions and deductions will be netted and the markup percentage
adjustments will be applied to the net amount.
1.12 CONTINGENCY
A.
In no event will any lump sum or percentage amounts for “contingency” be allowed to be added
as a separate line item in change order estimates. Unknowns attributable to labor hours will be
accounted for when estimating labor hours anticipated to perform the work. Unknowns
attributable to material scrap and waste will be estimated as part of material costs.
1.13 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL TIME AND CHANGE DIRECTIVES
A.
The Contractor’s proposals for changes in the contract amount or time shall be submitted within
seven (7) calendar days of the Owner’s request, unless the Owner extends such period of time
due to the circumstances involved. If such proposals are not received in a timely manner, if the
proposals are not acceptable to Owner, or if the changed work should be started immediately to
avoid damage to the project or costly delay, the Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed
with the changes without waiting for the Contractor’s proposal or for the formal change order to
be issued. In the case of an unacceptable Contractor proposal, the Owner may direct the
Contractor to proceed with the changed work on a cost-plus basis with an agreed upon
“not-to-exceed” price for the work to be performed. Such directions to the Contractor by the
Owner shall be confirmed in writing by a “Notice to Proceed on Changes” letter within seven (7)
calendar days. The cost or credit, and of time extensions will be determined by negotiations as
soon as practical thereafter and incorporated in a Change Order to the Contract.
14550 Westheimer Road
012657 - 3
Houston, Texas 77077
PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
CHANGE ORDERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
1.14 LIABILITY INSURANCE AND BONDS
A.
In the event of the Contractor has been required to furnish comprehensive general liability
insurance and/or performance and/or payment bonds as part of the base contract price, a final
contract change order will be processed to account for the Contractor’s net increase or
decrease in comprehensive general liability insurance costs and/or bond premium costs
associated with change orders to Contractor’s base price. Contract adjustments related to any
such increased or decreased costs related to insurance and/or bond coverage will not be
subject to any Contractor markup for overhead and profit.
1.15 COST PLUS FEE AGREEMENTS
A.
In those contract situations where the Contractor (Construction Manager, General Contractor,
Prime Contractor, Trade Contractor, Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor) has entered into a
cost plus fee with a guaranteed maximum contract arrangement where the basis of
compensation is reimbursement for defined “Cost of the Work” plus either a stated percentage
fee or fixed fee subject to an agreed upon contract guaranteed maximum price, the Contractor’s
total percentage fee or fixed fee to be paid under the terms of cost plus contract agreement
shall be adjusted either upward or downward by the same percentage stated in the applicable
portion of the cost plus fee agreement. The percentage markups to be applied for the pricing of
change orders which will increase or decrease the contract guaranteed maximum price will be
percentages outlined in paragraphs 1.07 and 1.08 of this Contract. However, those percentage
markups which are intended to cover field overhead and certain other direct costs attributable to
the change order work will not apply to adjustments in the total adjusted fee payable to the
Contractor under the cost plus fee portion of the contract agreement.
B.
For example, if the contract utilizes a Fixed Fee, the base contract Fixed Fee will be adjusted by
1/3 of the net percentage markups included in all approved change orders. The remaining 2/3
of the net markups on approved change orders will be considered an adjustment to the
Contractor’s general conditions budget.
1.16 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS
A.
As an alternative to Lump Sum Change Order Proposals, the Owner or the Construction
Manager acting with the approval of the Owner may choose the option to use Contract Unit
Prices. Agreed upon Contract Unit Prices shall be the same for added quantities and deductive
quantities. Unit Prices are not required to be used for pricing change orders where other
methods of pricing change order work are more equitable.
B.
The Contractor will submit, within seven (7) days after receipt of the Owner’s written request for
a Unit Price Proposal, a written Unit Price proposal itemizing the quantities of each item of work
for which there is an applicable Contract Unit Price. The quantities must be itemized in relation
to each specific contract drawing.
C.
Contract Unit Prices will be applied to net differences of quantities of the same item. Such
Contract Unit Prices will be considered to cover all direct and indirect costs of furnishing and
installing the item including the subcontractor’s Markup Percentage Fee.
1.17 COST PLUS CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS
A.
As an alternative to either Lump Sum Change Order Proposals or Unit Price Change Order
Proposals, the Owner may elect to have any extra work performed on a cost plus markup
percentage fee basis. Upon written notice to proceed, the Contractor shall perform such
authorized extra work at actual cost for direct labor (working foremen, journeymen, apprentices,
helpers, etc.), actual cost of labor burden, actual cost of material used to perform the extra
work, and actual cost of rental of major equipment (without any charge for administration,
clerical expense, general supervision or superintendent of any nature whatsoever, including
general foremen, or the cost of rental of small tools, minor equipment, or plant) plus the
approved Markup Percentage Fee. The intent of this clause is to define allowable cost plus
chargeable costs to be the same as those allowable when pricing Lump Sum Change Proposals
as outlined in subparagraphs 1.01 through 1.15 above. Owner and Contractor may agree in
advance in writing on a maximum price for this work and Owner shall not be liable for any
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
CHANGE ORDERS
012657 - 4
PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
charge in excess of the maximum. Daily time sheets with names of all Contractors’ employees
working on the project will be required to be submitted to the Owner for both labor and
equipment used by the Contractor for time periods during which extra work is performed on a
cost plus fee basis. Daily time sheets will break down the paid hours worked by the
Contractors’ employees showing both base contract work as well as extra work performed by
each employee.
1.18 ACCURATE CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION
A.
Contractor agrees that it is responsible for submitting accurate cost and pricing data to support
its Lump Sum Change and/or Cost Plus Change Order Proposals or other contract price
adjustments under the contract. Contractor further agrees to submit change order proposals
with cost and pricing data which is accurate, complete, current, and in accordance with the
terms of the contract with respect to pricing of change orders.
1.19 RIGHT TO VERIFY CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION
A.
Contractor agrees that any designated Owner’s representative will have the right to examine the
Contractor’s records (during the contract period and up to three years after final payment is
made on the contract) to verify the accuracy and appropriateness of the pricing data used to
price all change order proposals and/or claims. Contractor agrees that if the Owner determines
the cost and pricing data submitted (whether approved or not) was inaccurate, incomplete, not
current, or not in compliance with the terms of the contract regarding pricing of change orders,
an appropriate contract price adjustment will be made. Such post-approval contract price
adjustments will apply to all levels of contractors and/or subcontractors and to all types of
change order proposals specifically including lump sum change orders, unit price change
orders, and cost-plus change orders.
1.20 REQUIREMENTS FOR DETAILED CHANGE ORDER PRICING INFORMATION
A.
Contractor agrees to provide and require all Subcontractors to provide a breakdown of allowable
labor and labor burden cost information as outlined in this Document. This information will be
used to evaluate the potential cost of labor and labor burden related to change order work. It is
intended that this information represent an accurate estimate of the Contractor’s actual labor
and labor burden cost components. This information is not intended to establish fixed billing or
change order pricing labor rates. However, at the time change orders are priced, the submitted
cost data for labor rates may be used to price change order work. The accuracy of any such
agreed upon labor cost components used to price change orders will be subject to later audit.
Approved change order amounts may be adjusted later to correct the impact of inaccurate labor
cost components if the agreed upon labor cost components are determined to be inaccurate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
CHANGE ORDERS
012657 - 5
PRICING OF CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 013000
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preconstruction meeting.
B.
Progress meetings.
C.
Progress photographs.
D.
Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
E.
Submittal procedures.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 007200 - General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment.
B.
Document 007200 - General Conditions: Duties of the Construction Manager.
C.
Document 007300 - Supplementary Conditions: Duties of the Construction Manager.
D.
Section 013216 - Construction Progress Schedule: Form, content, and administration of
schedules.
E.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements.
F.
Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
1.03 PROJECT COORDINATION
A.
Project Coordinator: Vernon Wallace.
1. cell 713-444-0217
2. [email protected]
B.
Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices
and sheds, foraccess, traffic, and parking facilities.
C.
During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.
D.
Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals,
reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of
ambiguities and conflicts.
E.
Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and
construction facilities.
F.
Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.
G.
Make the following types of submittals to the Project Coordinator:
1. Progress schedules.
2. Progress photographs.
3. Applications for payment and change order requests.
4. Requests for interpretation, (RFI).
5. Requests for substitution.
6. Test and inspection reports.
7. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
8. Closeout submittals.
a. Constractor As-built set.
b. Warranties.
c. Operations Manuals.
H.
Make the following types of submittals to the Architect:
1. Progress photographs.
2. Requests for interpretation, (RFI).
3. Requests for substitution.
4. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
013000 - 1
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
5.
6.
7.
For Construction
09-24-13
Test and inspection reports.
Coordination drawings.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL
A.
Whenever possible and practical, all documents transmitted for purposes of administration of
the contract are to be in electronic (PDF) format and transmitted via e-mail or other accessible
FTP download site to the Owner's Project Coordinator.
1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to
requests for information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents
(e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for
payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant
wishes to make part of the project record.
2. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format.
3. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that
electronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts.
3.02 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING
A.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award.
B.
Attendance Required:
1. FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
2. Architect.
3. General Contractor.
4. Roofing Subcontractor
5. Waterproofing Subcontractor.
6. Finish Subcontractor
C.
Agenda:
1. Distribution of Contract Documents.
2. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress
schedule.
3. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for
payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
4. Scheduling.
5. Roofing as scheduled.
6. Finishes and waterproofing.
7. Pre-engineered Metal building coordination.
8. Foundation engineered coordination.
9. Canopy design coordination.
D.
Record minutes and distribute copies within __three__ days after meeting to participants, with
electronic copies to Architect, FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises, participants, and those
affected by decisions made.
3.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS
A.
Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly
intervals.
B.
Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at
meetings.
C.
Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers at General
Contractors determination, FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises, as appropriate to agenda
topics for each meeting.
D.
Agenda:
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
013000 - 2
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
E.
For Construction
09-24-13
Review minutes of previous meetings.
Review of Work progress.
Field observations, problems, and decisions.
Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals.
Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules.
Maintenance of progress schedule.
Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
Planned progress during succeeding work period.
Coordination of projected progress.
Maintenance of quality and work standards.
Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
Other business relating to Work.
Record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with
electronic copies to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises, participants, and those affected by
decisions made.
3.04 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - SEE SECTION 013216
A.
Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned
operations for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work.
B.
Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
3.05 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS
A.
Submit new photographs at least once a month, within 3 days after exposure.
1. Provide photographs in e-mail communication to Project Coordinator with 10-20 pictures at
regular intervals.
B.
Photography Type: Digital; electronic files.
C.
Provide photographs of site and construction throughout progress of Work.
D.
In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:
1. Completion of site clearing.
2. Excavations in progress.
3. Foundations in progress and upon completion.
4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion.
5. Enclosure of building, upon completion.
E.
Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide
files unaltered by photo editing software.
1. Delivery Medium: Via email or FTP site link.
3.06 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:
1. Product data.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Samples for selection.
4. Samples for verification.
B.
Submit to Owner's Project Coordinator for review for the limited purpose of checking for
conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract
documents.
C.
Provide in electronic format whenever possible with the exception of:
1. All submittals requiring approval by the Structural Engineer of record which should be
provided in hardcopy with a minimum of 5 copies (Architect, Engineer, Owner, General
Contractor, relevant trade subcontractor)
D.
Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
E. Verify in section for all submittal requirements, not to be less than:
14550 Westheimer Road
013000 - 3
Houston, Texas 77077
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
For Construction
09-24-13
Concrete mix designs.
Foudnation engineered drawings with Structural Engineer seal.
Pre-Engineered Metal Building drawings with Structural Engineer seal.
Canopy fabrication drawings with Structural Engineer seal.
Roofing.
Waterproofing, Wealants.
Finishes (includes a mock-up)
a. Eifs
b. Tile
c. Veneer masonry
d. Cmu
e. Paint
f.
Sheet metal
Lighting and electrical panelboards and equipment.
Plumbing
3.07 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
1. Design data.
2. Certificates.
3. Test reports.
4. Inspection reports.
5. Manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer's field reports.
7. Other types indicated.
3.08 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A.
When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
1. Project record documents.
2. Operation and maintenance data including keying schedule and keys.
3. Warranties and lien release.
4. Bonds.
5. Other types as indicated.
B.
Submit for FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's benefit during and after project completion.
3.09 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Transmit each submittal with approved form.
B.
Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a
sequential alphabetic suffix.
C.
Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and
specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
D.
Apply General Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification
of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of
information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents as to
the best of the General Contractors knowledge.
E.
Deliver submittals to Owner's Project Coordinator at business address via e-mail.
F.
Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
G.
For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
H.
Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
I.
Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
J.
When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
013000 - 4
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
K.
Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
comply with requirements.
L.
Submittals may not requested will not be recognized or processed.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
013000 - 5
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 013216
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preliminary schedule.
B.
Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 011000 - Summary: Work sequence.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
AGC (CPSM) - Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors
of America; 2004.
B.
M-H (CPM) - CPM in Construction Management - Project Management with CPM, O'Brien,
McGraw-Hill Book Company; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit a preliminary construction schedule for review
by the Architect and Owner .
1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
schedule.
B.
Within 10 days after joint review and comments by the Architect and Owner, submit complete
schedule.
C.
Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
1.05 SCHEDULE FORMAT
A.
Listings: In chronological order according to the start date for each activity. Identify each
activity with the applicable specification section number.
B.
Diagram Sheet Size: Maximum 11 x 17 inches or width required.
C.
Sheet Size: Multiples of 8-1/2 x 11 inches.
D.
Scale and Spacing: To allow for notations and revisions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE
A.
Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.
3.02 CONTENT
A.
Show complete sequence of construction by activity, with dates for beginning and completion of
each element of construction.
B.
Identify each item by specification section number.
C.
Show accumulated percentage of completion of each item, and total percentage of Work
completed, as of the first day of each month.
D.
Provide separate schedule of submittal dates for shop drawings, product data, and samples,
Products identified under Allowances, and dates reviewed submittals will be required from
Owner's Project Coordinator. Indicate decision dates for selection of finishes.
E.
Provide legend for symbols and abbreviations used.
3.03 BAR CHARTS
A.
Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation.
B.
Identify the first work day of each week.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
013216 - 1
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
3.04 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE
A.
Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal.
B.
Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule.
C.
After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.
3.05 UPDATING SCHEDULE
A.
Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities.
1. Issue updated schedule every 30 days (with pay application) regardless of site meeting or
other meeting schedule dates.
B.
Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each
activity.
C.
Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work.
D.
Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other
identifiable changes.
E.
Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion.
F.
Submit reports required to support recommended changes.
3.06 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE
A.
Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors,
suppliers, FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises, and other concerned parties.
B.
Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in
schedules.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
013216 - 2
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
References and standards.
B.
Quality assurance submittals.
C.
Mock-ups.
D.
Control of installation.
E.
Tolerances.
F.
Inspection services.
G.
Manufacturers' field services.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 003100 - Available Project Information: Soil investigation data.
B.
Document 007200 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public
authorities.
C.
Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
D.
Section 016000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2011c.
B.
ASTM D3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the
Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction;
2012a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the
manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities
specified for Product Data.
1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit
supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.
2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be
acceptable to Architect/Engineer.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed
instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter
conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application
or installation.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or
for FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
D.
Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for FT
1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information
given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES
A.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises will employ services of an independent testing agency
to perform certain specified testing; payment for cost of services will be derived from allowance
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
014000 - 1
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
specified in Section 012100; see Section 012100 and applicable sections for description of
services included in allowance.
B.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises will employ and pay for services of an independent
testing agency to perform other specified testing and inspection.
C.
Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in
accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION
A.
Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
C.
Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
Owner's Project Coordinator before proceeding.
D.
Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
workmanship.
E.
Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
F.
Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
manufacturer.
G.
Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
3.02 MOCK-UPS
A.
Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective
product specification sections.
B.
Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices,
flashings, seals, and finishes.
1. Provide materials assembled together on a minimum 4' x 4' sheet(s) of plywood mouted
vertically, facing the sun on the jobsite
C.
Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.
D.
Where mock-up has been accepted by Owner's Project Coordinator and is specified in product
specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work.
Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.
B.
Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract
Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding.
C.
Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A.
See individual specification sections for testing and inspection required.
B.
Testing Agency Duties:
1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Owner's Project Coordinator and
Contractor in performance of services.
2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified
standards.
3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
014000 - 2
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
4.
5.
6.
For Construction
09-24-13
Promptly notify Owner's Project Coordinator and Contractor of observed irregularities or
non-conformance of Work or products.
Perform additional tests and inspections required by Owner's Project Coordinator.
Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
C.
Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
D.
Contractor Responsibilities:
1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be
used that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to
manufacturers' facilities.
3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be
tested/inspected.
c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
4. Notify Owner's Project Coordinator and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for
operations requiring testing/inspection services.
5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
6. Arrange with FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's agency and pay for additional
samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
E.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same agency on instructions by Owner's Project Coordinator.
F.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
Contractor.
G.
Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed
by the same agency on instructions by the Owner's Project Coordinator. Payment for re-testing
will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Sum/Price.
3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES
A.
When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of
surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, as applicable, and to initiate instructions
when necessary.
B.
Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.
3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT
A.
Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.
B.
If, in the opinion of Owner's Project Coordinator, it is not practical to remove and replace the
Work, Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
014000 - 3
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Temporary utilities.
B.
Temporary telecommunications services.
C.
Temporary sanitary facilities.
D.
Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.
E.
Stairs, ramps, scaffolding and hoists.
F.
Security requirements.
G.
Vehicular access and parking.
H.
Waste removal facilities and services.
I.
Project identification sign.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 015100 - Temporary Utilities.
1.03 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - SEE SECTION 015100
A.
Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation
required for construction purposes.
B.
Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.
1.04 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES
A.
Provide cell phone access to Project Superintendent at time of project mobilization.
1.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES
A.
The General Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition chemical
type toilet facilities which comply with the requirements and regulations of the Department of
Health or of other bodies having jurisdiction. These facilities shall be available to all workers on
the job.
B.
Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
1.06 BARRIERS
A.
Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public
rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.
B.
Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.
C.
Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.
D.
Traffic Controls: As needed and directed by City of Houston.
1.07 STAIRS, RAMPS, SCAFFOLDING AND HOISTS
A.
Each Subcontractor shall provide and maintain temporary scaffolding, ramps, and runways as
required.
B.
Hoisting of materials and equipment shall be provided by the contractor requiring such hoisting.
C.
All apparatus, equipment, and construction included in this article shall be in accordance with all
applicable state and local laws.
D.
The General Contractor shall provide roof protection as necessary where scaffolds and chutes
are used.
1.08 SECURITY
A.
Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's
operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
015000 - 1
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
For Construction
09-24-13
Coordinate with Project Coordinator.
1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
A.
Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg
Enterprises.
B.
Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions.
C.
Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets, adjacent
properties or parking lots.
D.
Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is
not adequate, provide additional off-site parking. Coordinate with Satya Inc for all off-site
parking approvals.
1.10 WASTE REMOVAL
A.
Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and
orderly condition on a weekly basis.
B.
Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site weekly.
C.
If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable
non-combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure
unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers
with lids.
1.11 DEWATERING
A.
Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into the excavations and
flooding the project site and surrounding area.
B.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water from excavations to prevent
softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to the
stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps,
suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey the
water away from excavations.
C.
Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas. Establish
and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside the excavation limits for
each structure. Do not use trench excavations for site utilities as temporary drainage ditches.
1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION
A.
The Owner shall provide and the General Contractor shall recieve and install a project sign of 4'
x 8' exterior grade plywood and wood frame construction, painted, with exhibit lettering by
professional sign painter (graphic vinyl) to Architect/Engineer's design and colors.
B.
List title of project, names and main phone number of:
1. Owner
2. Architect
3. General Contractor
4. Leasing Broker
C.
Erect on site at location established by Project Coordinator.
D.
No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.
1.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS
A.
Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion
inspection.
B.
Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated.
C.
Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
D.
Sod and/or otherwise replace all disturbed soils on off-site areas.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
015000 - 2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
E.
For Construction
09-24-13
Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
015000 - 3
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 015100
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, and water.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Telephone service for administrative
purposes.
1.03 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY
A.
Cost: By Contractor.
B.
Provide power service required from utility source.
C.
Power Service Characteristics: per drawings volt, per drawings ampere, three phase, four wire.
D.
Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes
located as required. Provide flexible power cords as required.
E.
Provide main service disconnect and over-current protection at convenient location and meter.
F.
Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. Any damage as a
result of construction shall be repaired prior to buidling turnover.
G.
Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch
circuits for power and lighting.
1.04 TEMPORARY LIGHTING FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES
A.
Provide and maintain incandescent lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum
lighting level of 1 watt/sq ft or in accordance with OSHA requirements.
B.
Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails,
and lamps as required.
C.
Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs.
D.
Relocate lighting as required and as deemed necessary for progress of construction to maintain
lighting levels specified.
1.05 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE
A.
Cost of Water Used: By Contractor.
B.
Provide and maintain suitable quality water service for construction operations at time of project
mobilization.
C.
Connect to existing water source.
D.
Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded
connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
015100 - 1
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 015713
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Prevention of erosion due to construction activities.
B.
Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers
due to construction activities.
C.
Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures.
D.
Compensation of FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises for fines levied by authorities having
jurisdiction due to non-compliance by Contractor.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 311000 - Site Clearing: Limits on clearing; disposition of vegetative clearing debris.
B.
Section 312200 - Grading: Temporary and permanent grade changes for erosion control.
C.
Section 329223 - Sodding: Permanent turf for erosion control.
D.
Section 329300 - Plants: Permanent plantings for erosion control.
E.
Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for temporary and permanent erosion
control structures indicated on drawings.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D4355 - Standard Test Method for Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light,
Moisture, and Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus; 2007.
B.
ASTM D4491 - Standard Test Methods for Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity;
1999a (Reapproved 2009).
C.
ASTM D4533 - Standard Test Method for Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles; 2011.
D.
ASTM D4632 - Standard Test Method for Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles;
2008.
E.
ASTM D4751 - Standard Test Method for Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile;
2012.
F.
ASTM D4873 - Standard Guide for Identification, Storage, and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls
and Samples; 2002 (Reapproved 2009).
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic
inspection reports.
B.
Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until
applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable
permits.
1. FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises will withhold payment to Contractor equivalent to
all fines resulting from non-compliance with applicable regulations.
C.
Provide to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises a Performance Bond covering erosion and
sedimentation preventive measures only, in an amount equal to 100 percent of the cost of
erosion and sedimentation control work.
D.
Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface
cover and before precipitation occurs.
E.
Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover
due to construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels,
in excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever
is less.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
CONTROL
015713 - 1
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
For Construction
09-24-13
Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events
that might occur in 25 years.
F.
Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to
construction activities for this project.
1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil.
2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic.
3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at
no cost to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
G.
Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused
by water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project.
1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site.
2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site.
3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements.
4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at
no cost to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
H.
Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site,
including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary
sewers.
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises; remove deposited sediments; comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove
deposited sediment after each storm.
I.
Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site,
including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary
sewers.
1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises; remove deposited sediments; comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
J.
Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant.
K.
Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been
established.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan:
1. Submit not less than 30 days prior to anticipated start of clearing, grading, or other work
involving disturbance of ground surface cover.
2. Include:
a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas
vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage.
b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and
other temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures.
c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume
calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures.
d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities.
e. Other information required by law.
f.
Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is
also included.
3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction.
4. Obtain the approval of the Plan by FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
CONTROL
015713 - 2
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with
specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual
minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers.
D.
Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure,
indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Mulch: Use one of the following:
1. Straw or hay.
2. Wood waste, chips, or bark.
3. Erosion control matting or netting.
B.
Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season,
and intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use
species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons.
C.
Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales.
1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum.
2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension.
D.
Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long:
1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot.
2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section.
E.
Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and
insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the
following minimum average roll lengths:
1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with
ASTM D4751.
2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491.
3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in
accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure.
4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f, minimum, in
machine direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632.
5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632.
6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533.
7. Color: Manufacturer's standard, with embedment and fastener lines preprinted.
F.
Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long:
1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot.
2. Softwood, 4 by 4 inches in cross section.
3. Hardwood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such
existing features to greatest extent possible.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Silt Fences:
1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873.
2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use
nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum,
with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
CONTROL
015713 - 3
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
For Construction
09-24-13
Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use
nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum,
with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.
Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is
more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and
steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.
Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified.
Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping
at least 18 inches, with extra post.
Fasten fabric to wood posts using one of the following:
a. Four 3/4 inch diameter, 1 inch long, 14 gage nails.
b. Five 17-gage staples with 3/4 inch wide crown and 1/2 inch legs.
Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets.
Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash
pad or other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not
more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet.
B.
Straw Bale Rows:
1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row
turned uphill.
2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground.
3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground.
4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground;
drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together.
5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly.
6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted.
C.
Temporary Seeding:
1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required.
2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut
slopes, and conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying
sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate.
3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer
at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft.
4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq
ft.
5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding.
6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep
deep.
7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without
causing runoff or erosion.
8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A.
Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces
0.5 inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall.
B.
Repair deficiencies immediately.
C.
Silt Fences:
1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed.
2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence.
3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or
other causes.
D.
Straw Bale Rows:
1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed.
2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
CONTROL
015713 - 4
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
3.
For Construction
09-24-13
Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or
other causes.
E.
Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site.
F.
Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A.
Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted
to remain by Architect.
B.
Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures.
C.
Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an
acceptable grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
CONTROL
015713 - 5
TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
General product requirements.
B.
Transportation, handling, storage and protection.
C.
Product option requirements.
D.
Substitution limitations and procedures.
E.
Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Document 002113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior
to bid date.
B.
Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of
manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product.
1. Submit within 30 days after date of Agreement.
2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.
3. Submit using the Form provided.
B.
Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers'
standard data to provide information specific to this Project.
C.
Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project. Contract Documents shall not
be used for submittals.
D.
Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with
integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work.
1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the
manufacturer's standard colors, textures, and patterns.
E.
Indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility
outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 NEW PRODUCTS
A.
Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
B.
Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:
1. Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico.
2. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's.
3. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.
2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS
A.
Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
those standards or description.
B.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the
manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.
C.
Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
016000 - 1
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.03 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
individual specification sections.
B.
Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
A.
Whenever a product is specified or shown by describing proprietary items, model numbers,
catalog numbers, manufacturer, trade names, or similar reference, no substitutions may be
made unless accepted prior to execution of the Contract. When two or more products are
shown or specified, the Contractor has the option to use either of those shown or specified.
B.
Architect will consider requests for substitutions prior to the signing of the Owner/Contractor
Agreement.
C.
Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the
Contractor.
D.
Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution
with Contract Documents.
E.
A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality
level of the specified product.
2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the
Work to be complete with no additional cost to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become
apparent.
5. Will reimburse the Architect and Engineers for review or redesign services associated with
re-approval by authorities.
F.
Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or
product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require
revision to the Contract Documents.
G.
Equivalent products from manufacturers used as equal to the primary specification must meet
dimensional/weight/aesthetic qualities of the primary specification. The General Contractor
shall provide the Architect documentation clearly demonstrating compliance.
H.
Substitution Submittal Procedure:
1. Submit one copy in electronic format of request for substitution for consideration. Limit
each request to one proposed substitution.
2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
3. Provide sample of substitution to Architect/Engineer as requested.
4. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.
3.02 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A.
Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
storage time and potential damage to stored materials.
B.
Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
surrounding areas.
D.
Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
correct, and products are undamaged.
E.
Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
016000 - 2
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
F.
For Construction
09-24-13
Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A.
Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
excessive materials handling and misapplication.
B.
Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
C.
Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
D.
Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment
favorable to product.
E.
For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
F.
Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or
protection.
G.
Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to
prevent condensation and degradation of products.
H.
Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with
foreign matter.
I.
Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.
J.
Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,
disfigurement, or damage.
K.
Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify
products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
016000 - 3
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 017000
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.
B.
Surveying for laying out the work.
C.
Cleaning and protection.
D.
Starting of systems and equipment.
E.
Demonstration and instruction of FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises personnel.
F.
Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
G.
General requirements for maintenance service.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures.
B.
Section 014000 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.
C.
Section 015000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls:
D.
Section 015100 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.
E.
Section 015713 - Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Additional erosion and
sedimentation control requirements.
F.
Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance
data, warranties and bonds.
G.
Individual Product Specification Sections:
1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections.
2. Limitations on cutting structural members.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations;
2009.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects:
1. Structural integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.
3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element.
4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements.
5. Work of FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises or separate Contractor.
6. Include in request:
a. Identification of Project.
b. Location and description of affected work.
c. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
d. Description of proposed work and products to be used.
e. Effect on work of FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises or separate Contractor.
f.
Written permission of affected separate Contractor.
g. Date and time work will be executed.
C.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
017000 - 1
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
1.05 QUALIFICATIONS
A.
For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Texas and acceptable to Architect.
Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an
Insurance Certificate.
B.
For field engineering employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific
service on Project, licensed in North Carolina.
1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain
pumping equipment.
B.
Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site
from soil erosion.
C.
Dewatering:
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into the excavations
and flooding the project site and surrounding area.
2. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water from excavations to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes
detrimental to the stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps,
well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components
necessary to convey the water away from excavations.
3. Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting or run-off areas.
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside the
excavation limits for each structure. Do not use trench excavations for site utilities as
temporary drainage ditches.
D.
Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.
E.
Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects
from damaging the work.
F.
Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil,
water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by
construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
1.07 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,
with provisions for accommodating items installed later.
B.
Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
C.
Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible
with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities
for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.
D.
Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work
that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and
conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces
efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
E.
In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
F.
Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
G.
After FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site
for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to
minimize disruption of FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's activities.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
017000 - 2
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A.
New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching
and extending work.
B.
Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where
necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
C.
Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
described in Section 016000.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
B.
Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
applied or attached.
C.
Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.
D.
Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize
waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.
E.
Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct
locations.
F.
Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements
subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work,
assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means
acceptance of existing conditions. Under no circumstances shall structural elements be cut,
drilled, or otherwise altered without prior approval of the Architect and Structural Engineer.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Remove unsuitable material not marked for salvage, such as rotted wood, corroded metals, and
deteriorated masonry and concrete. Replace materials as specified for finished work.
B.
Remove debris and abandoned items from area and from concealed spaces.
C.
Prepare surfaces and remove surface finishes to provide for proper installation of new work and
finishes.
D.
Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.
E.
Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
F.
Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
3.03 LAYING OUT THE WORK
A.
Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
B.
Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered prior to construction.
C.
Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.
D.
Control datum for survey is that established by FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises
provided survey.
E.
Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
during construction.
F.
Promptly report to Owner's Project Coordinator the loss or destruction of any reference point or
relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
G.
Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
without prior written notice to Architect.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
017000 - 3
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
H.
Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
I.
Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
appropriate means:
1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement;
utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
2. Grid or axis for structures.
3. Building foundation, column locations, and floor elevations.
J.
Periodically verify layouts by same means.
K.
Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
3.04 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
B.
Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and
horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
3.05 PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
condition.
B.
Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed
or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
C.
Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning
to eliminate dust.
D.
Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site weekly and dispose
off-site; do not burn or bury.
3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK
A.
Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
B.
Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.
C.
Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
work area to prevent damage.
D.
Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
E.
Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement
of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
F.
Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is
necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material
manufacturer.
G.
Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
possible.
3.07 SYSTEM STARTUP
A.
Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
B.
Notify Owner's Project Coordinator and owner and Engineer seven days prior to start-up of each
item.
C.
Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
017000 - 4
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
D.
For Construction
09-24-13
Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by
the equipment or system manufacturer.
E.
Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
F.
Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
G.
When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system
installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
3.08 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION
A.
Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,
and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
B.
For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other
season within six months.
C.
Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration
and instruction of owner personnel.
3.09 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
B.
Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Sections 15990 and 01400.
3.10 FINAL CLEANING
A.
Execute final cleaning after Substantial Completion but before making final application for
payment.
B.
Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
C.
Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains
and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces,
D.
Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
E.
Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
surface and material being cleaned.
F.
Clean filters of operating equipment.
G.
Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
H.
Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
I.
Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site;
dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
A.
Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
1. Provide copies to Architect and FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
B.
Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for
completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion.
C.
Notify Owner's Project Coordinator when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion.
D.
Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been
inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
Owner's Project Coordinator's review.
E.
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises will occupy all of the building as specified in Section
011000.
F.
Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
requirements for access to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises-occupied areas.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
017000 - 5
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
G.
Contractor shall complete all punchlist items by the required Final Completion date or within
thirty (30) days after the final punchlist is prepared, whichever is first.
H.
Notify Owner's Project Coordinator when work is considered finally complete.
I.
Complete items of work determined by Owner's Project Coordinator's final inspection.
3.12 MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
B.
Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one
year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever
is longer.
C.
Furnish service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections during the
warranty period.
D.
Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust,
and lubricate as required.
E.
Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace
parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
F.
Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
prior written consent of the FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
017000 - 6
EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 017800
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Project Record Documents.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data.
C.
Warranties and bonds.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 007200 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment
bonds, warranty, and correction of work.
B.
Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product
data, and samples.
C.
Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.
D.
Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.
E.
Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Owner's Project Coordinator with claim for
final Application for Payment. Record documents shall include full as-built conditions.
Contractor shall maintain a full up to date record document set throughout the Project's
construction. General Contractor shall provide minimum of two (2) full record as-built sets of
documents, one set is to go to the Architect and one to the Owner.
B.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before
start of Work. Owner's Project Coordinator will review draft and return one copy with
comments.
2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and
operated by FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises, submit completed documents within
ten days after acceptance.
3. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final observation. This copy will
be reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Owner's Project Coordinator
comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.
4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final field
observation.
C.
Warranties and Bonds:
1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with
FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's permission, submit documents within 10 days
after acceptance.
2. Make other submittals within 10 days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final
Application for Payment.
3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial
Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the
beginning of the warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work:
1. Drawings.
2. Specifications.
3. Addenda.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
017800 - 1
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
4.
For Construction
09-24-13
Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract.
B.
Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by FT 1463 Ltd, /
Williamsburg Enterprises.
C.
Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.
D.
Record information concurrent with construction progress.
E.
Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products
installed, including the following:
1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number.
2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized.
3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.
F.
The Project Coordinator shall submit for the Architect's review, the current list of all O.W.I.P.
action items with the dates of completion and the person responsible for verifying the work was
completed. For items not completed at substantial completion, the Project Coordinator shall
annotate the anticipated date of completion for each item.
G.
Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction
including:
1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,
referenced to permanent surface improvements.
2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,
referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work.
3. Field changes of dimension and detail.
4. Details not on original Contract drawings.
3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A.
For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors
and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.
B.
Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and
data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.
C.
Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and
systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as
maintenance drawings.
D.
Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions
for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A.
For Each Item of Equipment and Each System:
1. Description of unit or system, and component parts.
2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests.
4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.
B.
Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and
communications; typed.
C.
Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and
sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.
Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.
D.
Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative
maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and
alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.
E.
Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.
F.
Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
017800 - 2
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
G.
Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams
required for maintenance.
H.
Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.
3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance, cleaning and operation
of described products.
B.
Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. One manuals will be required.
C.
Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 by 11 inch three D side ring binders with durable plastic
covers; 2 inch maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related
consistent groupings.
D.
Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.
E.
Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product
and major component parts of equipment.
F.
Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on _____ pound paper.
G.
Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to
size of text pages.
H.
Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this
Project Manual.
I.
Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system
description identified, in three parts as follows:
1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect,
Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers.
2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by
specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following:
a. Significant design criteria.
b. List of equipment.
c. Parts list for each component.
d. Operating instructions.
e. Maintenance instructions for finishes, equipment and systems.
f.
Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning
methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.
3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following:
a. Shop drawings and product data.
b. Certificates.
c. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.
3.05 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
A.
Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers,
and manufacturers, within 10 days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for
items put into use with FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's permission, leave date of
beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.
B.
Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.
C.
Co-execute submittals when required.
D.
Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
E.
Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of
Contents.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
017800 - 3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 030505
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sheet vapor barrier under concrete slabs on grade.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 031000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories: Forms and accessories for formwork.
B.
Section 032000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
B.
ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor barrier to be used.
D.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation procedures and interface required
with adjacent construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Underslab Vapor Barrier:
1. Water Vapor Permeance: Not more than 0.010 perms, maximum.
2. Thickness: 15 mils.
3. Basis of Design:
a. Stego Industries LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier (15-mil): www.stegoindustries.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Accessory Products: Vapor barrier manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive, mastic, etc.,
for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor barrier.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that surface over which vapor barrier is to be installed is complete and ready before
proceeding with installation of vapor barrier.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E1643.
B.
Install vapor barrier under interior slabs on grade; lap sheet over footings and seal to foundation
walls.
C.
Lap joints minimum 6 inches.
D.
Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's recommended products and
follow manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
No penetration of vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.
F.
Repair damaged vapor retarder before covering with other materials.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
030505 - 1
UNDERSLAB VAPOR BARRIER
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 031000
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage.
B.
Openings for other work.
C.
Form accessories.
D.
Form stripping.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03200 - Concrete Reinforcement.
B.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
Section 03390 - Concrete Curing.
D.
Section 04816 - Masonry Veneer: Spacing for veneer anchor reglets recessed in concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials;
2006.
B.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute;
2005.
C.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute; 2008.
D.
ACI 347 - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute; 2004.
E.
ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers; 2007.
F.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on void form materials and installation requirements.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensions, materials, bracing, and arrangement of joints
and ties.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver void forms and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging.
B.
Store void forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from
moisture.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK - GENERAL
A.
Provide concrete forms, accessories, shoring, and bracing as required to accomplish
cast-in-place concrete work.
B.
Design and construct to provide resultant concrete that conforms to design with respect to
shape, lines, and dimensions.
C.
Comply with applicable state and local codes with respect to design, fabrication, erection, and
removal of formwork.
D.
Comply with relevant portions of ACI 347, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
031000 - 1
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.02 WOOD FORM MATERIALS
A.
Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor.
2.03 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A.
Form Ties: Removable type, galvanized metal, fixed length, cone type, with waterproofing
washer, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in concrete surface.
B.
Form Release Agent: Colorless mineral oil that will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, impair
natural bonding of concrete finish coatings, or affect color characteristics of concrete finish
coatings.
C.
Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, 22 gage (0.8 mm) thick, foam filled, release tape sealed
slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork.
D.
Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength
and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree
with drawings.
3.02 ERECTION - FORMWORK
A.
Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B.
Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to
overstressing by construction loads.
3.03 APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT
A.
Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B.
Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied
coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water.
Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.04 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A.
Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in passing through concrete
work.
B.
Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete.
C.
Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work.
D.
Position recessed anchor slots for brick veneer masonry anchors to spacing and intervals
specified in Section 04816.
E.
Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level,
and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement.
F.
Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and
inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
G.
Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly
fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces.
3.05 FORM CLEANING
A.
Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms.
B.
Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete.
1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that
water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
031000 - 2
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
For Construction
09-24-13
During cold weather, remove ice and snow from within forms. Do not use de-icing salts.
Do not use water to clean out forms, unless formwork and concrete construction proceed
within heated enclosure. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.
3.06 FORMWORK TOLERANCES
A.
Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 117.
B.
Construct and align formwork for elevator hoistway in accordance with ASME A17.1.
C.
Camber slabs and beams in accordance with ACI 301.
3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
01400.
B.
Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with
formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
3.08 FORM REMOVAL
A.
Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own
weight and imposed loads.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
031000 - 3
CONCRETE FORMS AND ACCESSORIES
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 032000
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Reinforcing steel for cast-in-place concrete.
B.
Supports and accessories for steel reinforcement.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03100 - Concrete Forms and Accessories
B.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
C.
Section 03356 - Concrete Floor Finishing: Reinforcement for concrete floor toppings.
D.
Section 04810 - Unit Masonry Assemblies: Reinforcement for masonry.
E.
Section 04820 - Reinforced Unit Masonry Assemblies: Reinforcement for engineered masonry.
F.
Section 16060 - Grounding and Bonding: Grounding connection to concrete reinforcement.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
B.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements For Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2008.
C.
ACI SP-66 - ACI Detailing Manual; American Concrete Institute International; 2004.
D.
ASTM A 82/A 82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
2007.
E.
ASTM A 185/A 185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
F.
ASTM A 497/A 497M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed,
for Concrete; 2007.
G.
ASTM A 615/A 615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2007.
H.
AWS D1.4/D1.4M - Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; American Welding Society;
2005
I.
CRSI (P1) - Placing Reinforcing Bars; Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute; Eighth Edition.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Comply with requirements of ACI SP-66. Include bar schedules, shapes of
bent bars, spacing of bars, and location of splices.
C.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that reinforcing steel and accessories supplied for this project
meet or exceed specified requirements.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Plain billet-steel bars.
2. Unfinished.
3. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, deformed type.
a. Flat Sheets.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
032000 - 1
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
4.
For Construction
09-24-13
Reinforcement Accessories:
a. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm).
b. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Welding of reinforcement is permitted only with the specific approval of Architect. Perform
welding in accordance with AWS D1.4.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A.
Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required
position.
B.
Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as follows:
1. Walls (exposed to weather or backfill): 3 inch (____ mm).
2. Footings and Concrete Formed Against Earth: 3 inch (____ mm).
3. Conform to applicable code for concrete cover over reinforcement.
4. Bond and ground all reinforcement to requirements of Section 16060.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency, as specified in Section 01400, will inspect installed
reinforcement for conformance to contract documents before concrete placement.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
032000 - 2
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 033000
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete formwork.
B.
Floors and slabs on grade.
C.
Concrete shear walls, elevator shaft walls, and foundation walls.
D.
Concrete reinforcement.
E.
Joint devices associated with concrete work.
F.
Miscellaneous concrete elements, including equipment pads, light pole bases, flagpole bases,
thrust blocks, and manholes.
G.
Concrete curing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving: Sidewalks, curbs and gutters.
B.
Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
B.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2010.
C.
ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004 (errata 2007).
D.
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 2000.
E.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
F.
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
G.
ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001
(Reapproved 2008).
H.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2008.
I.
ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
J.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2009b.
K.
ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011.
L.
ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2010.
M. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2011.
N.
ASTM C143/C143M - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2010a.
O.
ASTM C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011.
P.
ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
Q.
ASTM C173/C173M - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method; 2010b.
R.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
033000 - 1
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
S.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete; 2008a.
T.
ASTM C685/C685M - Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
Continuous Mixing; 2010.
U.
ASTM C979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2010.
V.
ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout
(Nonshrink); 2011.
W. ASTM D994 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
(Bituminous Type); 1998 (Reapproved 2010).
X.
ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation and Inspection of Water
Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with
specified requirements and installation instructions.
C.
Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
D.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and
components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
B.
Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C.
Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
1.06 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct and erect mock-up panel for architectural concrete surfaces indicated to receive
special treatment or finish.
1. Panel Size: Sufficient to illustrate full range of treatment.
a. Flooring polishing, color and texture
b. Rubbed finish for exterior curbs.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORMWORK
A.
Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand
hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will
provide smooth, stain-free final appearance.
2. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with
application of coatings.
3. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches of concrete
surface.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420).
1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.
2. Finish: Unfinished, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type.
1. Form: Coiled Rolls.
2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6.
C.
Reinforcement Accessories:
1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
033000 - 2
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
3.
For Construction
09-24-13
Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
reinforcement during concrete placement.
Provide stainless steel, galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for
placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal Portland type.
B.
Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33.
C.
Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
D.
Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into
concrete and complying with ASTM C979.
1. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.
E.
Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES
A.
Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight
of cement.
B.
Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.
2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer, fabric-, cord-, grid-, or aluminum-reinforced
polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as
suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of
single ply polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder.
2. Acceptable Products:
a. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier 15-mil (Class A):
www.stegoindustries.com.
B.
Insulated Underslab Vapor Retarder: Multi-layer product of high density closed-cell foam and
high density polyethylene bubble sandwiched between outer layers of aluminum-reinforced
polyethylene or equivalent, complying with ASTM E1643, stated by manufacturer as suitable for
installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. The use of single ply
polyethylene is prohibited.
1. Accessory Products: Vapor retarder manufacturer's recommended tape, adhesive,
mastic, prefabricated boots, etc., for sealing seams and penetrations in vapor retarder.
C.
Non-Shrink Cementitious Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; premixed compound consisting of
non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents.
1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 48 Hours: 2,400 psi.
2. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 psi.
D.
Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear
polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.
E.
Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, clear or translucent.
2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS
A.
Slab Isolation Joint Filler: 1/2 inch thick, height equal to slab thickness, with removable top
section that will form 1/2 inch deep sealant pocket after removal.
B.
Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, 1/2 inch thick and 4
inches deep; tongue and groove profile.
C.
Joint Filler: Compressible asphalt mastic with felt facers, complying with ASTM D 994, 1/4 inch
thick and 4 inches deep.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
033000 - 3
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
D.
Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel,
with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebars to pass through at 6 inches on center;
ribbed steel stakes for setting.
1. Provide removable plastic cap strip that forms wedge-shaped joint for sealant installation.
2. Height: To suit slab thickness.
E.
Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900.
2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A.
Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B.
Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Normal Weight Concrete:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days:
3500 psi.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
4. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C173/C173M.
5. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.
2.08 MIXING
A.
On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685. Mix each batch not
less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
1. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to
achieve consistent color from batch to batch.
B.
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Formwork: Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all
applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B.
Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
C.
Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
form accessories.
D.
Where new concrete is to be bonded to previously placed concrete, prepare existing surface by
cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
E.
Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints
minimum 6 inches. Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's
recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor
retarder before covering.
1. Vapor Retarder Over Granular Fill: Install compactible granular fill before placing vapor
retarder as shown on the drawings. Do not use sand.
3.02 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT AND OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and
accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete
coverage required for protection.
B.
Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both
directions. Splice laps with tie wire.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B.
Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1R.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
033000 - 4
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
D.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices will not
be disturbed during concrete placement.
E.
Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
3.04 SLAB JOINTING
A.
Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
B.
Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
C.
Isolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant, total
height equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
3.05 FLOOR FLATNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
A.
Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas
requiring corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
B.
Floor flatness must be FF 40 or better.
3.06 CONCRETE FINISHING
A.
Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
B.
Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in
height.
C.
Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1R, and as follows:
1. Decorative Exposed Surfaces: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R; use
steel-reinforced plastic trowel blades instead of steel blades to avoid black-burnish marks;
decorative exposed surfaces include surfaces to be stained or dyed, pigmented concrete,
surfaces to be polished, and all other slab surfaces.
a. It is assumed that all tenants may potentially use the exposed slab as decorative
exposed surface.
2. Other Surfaces to Be Left Exposed: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1R, minimizing
burnish marks and other appearance defects.
3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B.
Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
1. Normal concrete: Not less than 7 days.
C.
Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry.
Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated
sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap.
2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.
b. Curing Compound: Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate
recommended by manufacturer.
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
01400.
B.
Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed firm.
C.
Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for review
prior to commencement of concrete operations.
D.
Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure conformance
with specified requirements.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
033000 - 5
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
E.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
F.
Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under same
conditions as concrete it represents.
G.
Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken, following procedures of ASTM
C143/C143M.
3.09 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE
A.
Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
within 24 hours of test.
B.
Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances
or specified requirements.
C.
Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified.
D.
Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction
of Architect for each individual area.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
033000 - 6
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 033900
CONCRETE CURING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Initial and final curing of horizontal and vertical concrete surfaces.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 03300 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B.
Section 03356 - Concrete Floor Finishing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2005.
B.
ACI 302.1R - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute
International; 2004 (Errata 2007) .
C.
ACI 308R - Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001
(Reapproved 2008).
D.
ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
E.
ASTM C 309 - Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
Concrete; 2007.
F.
ASTM D 2103 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Film and Sheeting; 2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver curing materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309 Type 1 - Clear or translucent, Class A.
1. Acrylic type.
B.
Moisture-Retaining Sheet: ASTM C 171.
1. Curing paper, regular.
2. Polyethylene film, clear, minimum nominal thickness of 0.0040 in. (0.10 mm).
C.
Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 2103, 4 mil (0.1 mm) thick, clear
D.
Water: Potable, not detrimental to concrete.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to be cured.
3.02 EXECUTION - HORIZONTAL SURFACES
A.
Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308R.
B.
Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
C.
Ponding: Maintain 100 percent coverage of water over floor slab areas, continuously for 4 days.
D.
Spraying: Spray water over floor slab areas and maintain wet for 7 days.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
033900 - 1
CONCRETE CURING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
E.
Moisture-Retaining Sheet: Lap strips not less than 3 inches (75 mm) and seal with waterproof
tape or adhesive; secure at edges; maintain in place for not less than 4 days.
F.
Membrane Curing Compound: Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions in one coat.
3.03 EXECUTION - VERTICAL SURFACES
A.
Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308R.
B.
Cure surfaces in accordance with ACI 308.
C.
Spraying: Spray water over surfaces and maintain wet for 7 days.
D.
Membrane Curing Compound: Apply compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions
in one coat.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor surface.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
033900 - 2
CONCRETE CURING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 040511
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Mortar for masonry.
B.
Grout for masonry.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 042000 - Unit Masonry: Installation of mortar and grout.
B.
Section 044301 - Cut Thin Stone Masonry Veneer: Installation of mortar.
C.
Section 047200 - Cast Stone Masonry: Installation of mortar.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
B.
ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012.
C.
ASTM C144 - Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2011.
D.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
E.
ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012.
F.
ASTM C476 - Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2010.
G.
ASTM C979/C979M - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete;
2010.
H.
ASTM C1148 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Drying Shrinkage of Masonry Mortar;
1992a (Reapproved 2008).
I.
ASTM C1314 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms; 2012.
J.
ASTM C1357 - Standard Test Methods for Evaluating Masonry Bond Strength; 2009.
K.
ASTM E514/E514M - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through
Masonry; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Maintain packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, and foreign
matter.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT APPLICATIONS
A.
Mortar Mix Designs: ASTM C270, Property Specification.
1. Masonry below grade and in contact with earth: Type S.
2. Exterior Masonry Veneer: Type N.
3. Exterior Cavity Walls: Type S mortar with Type N pointing mortar.
4. Engineered Masonry: Type M.
5. Exterior, Loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
6. Exterior, Non-loadbearing Masonry: Type N.
7. Exterior Repointing Mortar: Type N with maximum 2 percent ammonium stearate or
calcium stearate per cement weight.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type N.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
040511 - 1
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I - Normal; color as required to produce approved color
sample. Provide ________ manufactured by ____________.
C.
Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144.
D.
Pigments for Colored Mortar: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for
mixing into mortar and complying with ASTM C979/C979M.
1. Color(s): As indicated on drawings.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Solomon Colors; Solomon Colors Concentrated A, H, and X Series:
www.solomoncolors.com.
b. Davis Colors; Product ____: www.daviscolors.com.
c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
E.
Water: Clean and potable.
F.
Integral Water Repellent Admixture: Polymeric liquid admixture added to mortar and grout at
the time of manufacture.
1. Performance of Mortar and Grout with Integral Water Repellent:
a. Water Permeance: When tested per ASTM E514 and for a minimum of 72 hours:
1) No water visible on back of wall above flashing at the end of 24 hours.
2) No flow of water from flashing equal to or greater than 0.032 gallons per hour at
the end of 24 hours.
3) No more than 25% of wall area above flashing visibly damp at end of test.
b. Flexural Bond Strength: ASTM C1357; minimum 10% increase.
c. Compressive Strength: ASTM C1314; maximum 5% decrease.
d. Drying Shrinkage: ASTM C1148; maximum 5% increase in shrinkage.
2. Use only in combination with masonry units produced with integral water repellent
admixture.
2.03 MORTAR MIXES
2.04 MORTAR MIXING
A.
Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients using mechanical batch mixer, in accordance with ASTM
C270 and in quantities needed for immediate use.
B.
Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process.
C.
Add mortar color in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide uniformity of mix and
coloration.
D.
Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
E.
Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
F.
If water is lost by evaporation, re-temper only within two hours of mixing.
2.05 GROUT MIXES
2.06 GROUT MIXING
A.
Mix grout in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M.
B.
Thoroughly mix grout ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance with
ASTM C476 for fine and coarse grout.
C.
Add admixtures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; mix uniformly.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install mortar and grout to requirements of section(s) in which masonry is specified.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
040511 - 2
MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 042000
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete Block.
B.
Mortar and Grout.
C.
Reinforcement and Anchorage.
D.
Flashings.
E.
Accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 032000 - Concrete Reinforcing: Reinforcing steel for grouted masonry.
B.
Section 040511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting.
C.
Section 079005 - Joint Sealers: Backing rod and sealant at control and expansion joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A82/A82M - Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement;
2007.
B.
ASTM A641/A641M - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire;
2009a.
C.
ASTM C90 - Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2012.
D.
ASTM C129 - Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2011.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Samples: Submit 2 samples of decorative block units to illustrate color, texture, and extremes
of color range.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct a masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 2 feet long by 2 feet high; include mortar
and accessories and structural backup in mock-up.
B.
Locate any convienient site location.
C.
Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A.
Concrete Block: Comply with referenced standards and as follows:
1. Size:
a. Typical: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal
depth of 8 inches.
b. Base course: Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and
nominal depth of 2 inches and 6 inches (see plans for detail).
c. Standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 x 8 inches and nominal depths as
indicated on the drawings for specific locations
2. Load-Bearing Units: ASTM C90, normal weight.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
3. Non-Loadbearing Units: ASTM C129.
a. Hollow block, as indicated.
b. Exposed faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture where indicated.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
042000 - 1
UNIT MASONRY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.02 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS
A.
Mortar and grout: As specified in Section 040511.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Manufacturers of Joint Reinforcement and Anchors:
1. Dur-O-Wal: www.dur-o-wal.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand): www.h-b.com.
3. WIRE-BOND: www.wirebond.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Reinforcing Steel: Type specified in Section 032000; size as indicated on drawings; galvanized
finish.
C.
Joint Reinforcement: Use ladder type joint reinforcement where vertical reinforcement is
involved and truss type elsewhere, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Single Wythe Joint Reinforcement: Truss type; ASTM A 82/A 82M steel wire, mill galvanized to
ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3; 0.1483 inch side rods with 0.1483 inch cross rods; width as
required to provide not more than 1 inch and not less than 1/2 inch of mortar coverage on each
exposure.
2.04 FLASHINGS
A.
Rubberized Asphalt Flashing: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet; 0.030 inch total
thickness; with cross-linked polyethylene top and bottom surfaces.
B.
Lap Sealant: Butyl type as specified in Section 079005.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Joint Filler: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride; oversized 50 percent to joint width; self expanding;
____ inch wide x by maximum lengths available.
B.
Weeps: Polyethylene tubing.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dur-O-Wal; Product ____: www.dur-o-wal.com.
C.
Cleaning Solution: Non-acidic, not harmful to masonry work or adjacent materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive masonry.
B.
Verify that related items provided under other sections are properly sized and located.
C.
Verify that built-in items are in proper location, and ready for roughing into masonry work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Direct and coordinate placement of metal anchors supplied for installation under other sections.
B.
Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work. Maintain in place until building
structure provides permanent bracing.
3.03 COLD AND HOT WEATHER REQUIREMENTS
A.
Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during,
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
B.
Maintain materials and surrounding air temperature to maximum 90 degrees F prior to, during,
and 48 hours after completion of masonry work.
3.04 COURSING
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing indicated. Protect from displacement.
B.
Maintain masonry courses to uniform dimension. Form vertical and horizontal joints of uniform
thickness.
C.
Concrete Masonry Units:
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
042000 - 2
UNIT MASONRY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
2.
For Construction
09-24-13
Bond: Running.
Mortar Joints: Concave.
3.05 WEEPS/CAVITY VENTS
A.
Install weeps in veneer and cavity walls at 24 inches on center horizontally above through-wall
flashing, above shelf angles and lintels, and at bottom of walls.
3.06 CAVITY MORTAR CONTROL
A.
Do not permit mortar to drop or accumulate into cavity air space or to plug weep/cavity vents.
B.
Install cavity mortar diverter at base of cavity and at other flashing locations as recommended
by manufacturer to prevent mortar droppings from blocking weep/cavity vents.
3.07 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE - GENERAL
A.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings or specified under specific wall type, install horizontal
joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B.
Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above and below
openings. Extend minimum 16 inches each side of opening.
C.
Place continuous joint reinforcement in first and second joint below top of walls.
D.
Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches.
E.
Reinforce stack bonded unit joint corners and intersections with strap anchors 16 inches on
center.
3.08 MASONRY FLASHINGS
A.
Whether or not specifically indicated, install masonry flashing to divert water to exterior at all
locations where downward flow of water will be interrupted.
B.
Extend plastic, laminated, and EPDM flashings to within 1/4 inch of exterior face of masonry.
3.09 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints.
B.
Size control joint in accordance with Section 079005 for sealant performance.
3.10 BUILT-IN WORK
A.
As work progresses, install built-in metal door frames and other items to be built into the work
and furnished under other sections.
B.
Install built-in items plumb, level, and true to line.
C.
Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in adjacent mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid
with grout.
1. Fill adjacent masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings.
D.
Do not build into masonry construction organic materials that are subject to deterioration.
3.11 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar and mortar droppings.
B.
Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work.
C.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
D.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
3.12 PROTECTION
A.
Without damaging completed work, provide protective boards at exposed external corners that
are subject to damage by construction activities.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
042000 - 3
UNIT MASONRY
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 044301
NATURAL STONE MASONRY VENEER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
NATURAL stone veneer at exterior walls.
B.
Metal anchors and accessories.
C.
Setting mortar and pointing mortar.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on stone units, ________, mortar, and reinforcement.
C.
Samples: Submit two stone samples illustrating minimum and maximum stone sizes, color
range, texture, and markings.
D.
Samples: Submit mortar color samples.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum
ten years of documented experience.
1.04 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct stone wall mock-up, 2 feet long by 2 feet wide; include stone anchor accessories,
corner condition, and typical control joint in mock-up.
B.
Locate any convienient site location.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect stone from discoloration during storage on site.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Stone Quarriers:
1. As per plans
2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Stone Masonry Reinforcement and Accessories
1. Blok-Lok Limited; Product ____: www.blok-lok.com.
2. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc (including Dur-O-Wal brand); Product ____: www.h-b.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STONE
A.
Manufacturer: Cooper Stone
2.03 MORTAR
A.
Setting Mortar: ASTM C270, Type S, using the Proportion Method as specified in Section
040511.
B.
Pointing Mortar: Type N as specified in Section 040511, and using the Property Method in
ASTM C270.
1. Color: Mineral oxide pigment; ________ color. Provide ________ manufactured by
____________.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Wall Ties: Formed steel wire, ____ gage diameter, hot dip galvanized per ASTM A123/A123M,
eye and pintle type, with provision for vertical adjustment after attachment.
B.
Other Anchors in Direct Contact with Stone: ASTM A666, Type 304, stainless steel, of sizes
and configurations required for support of stone and applicable superimposed loads.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
044301 - 1
NATURAL STONE MASONRY VENEER
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Setting Buttons and Shims: Lead.
D.
Flashings: galvanized type as specified in Section 076200 and on plans.
E.
Weep/Cavity Vents: Polyethylene tubing.
F.
Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces.
2.05 STONE FABRICATION
A.
Nominal Thickness: 4" max inch.
B.
Pattern and Coursing: per plans.
C.
Fabricate for 3/8 inch beds and joints.
D.
Form stone corners to irregular joint profile. Clean jagged corners from stone in preparation for
setting.
E.
Slope exposed top surfaces of stone and horizontal sill surfaces for shedding water.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that support work and site conditions are ready to receive work of this section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance.
B.
Clean stone prior to erection. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage
exposed surfaces.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install flashings of longest practical length and seal watertight to back-up. Lap end joints
minimum 6 inches and seal watertight.
1. Flashings must terminate outside finished surfaces.
B.
Size stone units to fit opening dimensions and perimeter conditions.
C.
Wet absorptive stone in preparation for placement to minimize moisture suction from mortar.
D.
Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and minimize visual variations, and provide a
uniform blend of stone unit sizes.
E.
Provide setting and pointing mortar in accordance with Section 040511.
F.
Set stone in full mortar setting bed to fully support stone over bearing surface. Use setting
buttons or shims to maintain correct joint width.
G.
Install weep/cavity vents in vertical stone joints at ____ inches on center horizontally;
immediately above horizontal flashings, above shelf angles and supports, and at top of each
cavity space; do not permit mortar accumulation in cavity space.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGE
A.
Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center.
B.
Embed wall ties in masonry back-up to bond veneer to back-up at maximum 16 inches on
center vertically and 36 inches on center horizontally.
C.
In addition, place wall ties at maximum 3 inches on center each way around perimeter of
openings, within 12 inches of openings.
3.05 JOINTS
A.
Leave the following joints open for sealant:
1. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps.
2. Joints in projecting units.
3. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers.
4. Joints below ledge and relieving angles.
5. Joints labeled "expansion joint".
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
044301 - 2
NATURAL STONE MASONRY VENEER
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Rake out mortar joints 5/8 to 3/4 inch and brush joints clean to accommodate pointing mortar.
Fill joints with pointing mortar.
C.
Pack mortar into joints and work into voids. Neatly tool surface to concave joint.
D.
At joints to be sealed, clean mortar out of joint before it sets. Brush joints clean.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove excess mortar as work progresses, and upon completion of work.
B.
Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution.
C.
Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
044301 - 3
NATURAL STONE MASONRY VENEER
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 047200
CAST STONE MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Architectural cast stone.
B.
Units required are:
1. Exterior wall units, including bases and watertable.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 040511 - Masonry Mortaring and Grouting: Mortar for setting cast stone.
B.
Section 042000 - Unit Masonry: Installation of cast stone in conjunction with masonry.
C.
Section 079005 - Joint Sealers: Materials and execution methods for sealing soft joints in cast
stone work.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American
Concrete Institute International; 2011.
B.
ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
C.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
D.
ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
E.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
F.
ASTM C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2012.
G.
ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012.
H.
ASTM C1364 - Standard Specification for Architectural Cast Stone; 2010b.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Mortar Color Selection Samples.
C.
Verification Samples: Pieces of actual cast stone components not less than 3 inches square,
illustrating range of color and texture to be anticipated in components furnished for the project.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Architectural Cast Stone:
1. Any current producer member of the Cast Stone Institute.
2. Siteworks or approved equal.
2.02 ARCHITECTURAL CAST STONE
A.
Cast Stone: Architectural concrete product manufactured to simulate appearance of natural
sandstone, complying with ASTM C1364.
1. Compressive Strength: As specified in ASTM C1364; calculate strength of pieces to be
field cut at 80 percent of uncut piece.
2. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Demonstrated by field experience.
3. Surface Texture: Fine grained texture, with no bugholes, air voids, or other surface
blemishes visible from distance of 20 feet.
4. Color: as per drawings, submit sample.
5. Remove cement film from exposed surfaces before packaging for shipment.
B.
Shapes: Provide shapes indicated on drawings.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
047200 - 1
CAST STONE MASONRY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
2.
C.
For Construction
09-24-13
Variation from Any Dimension, Including Bow, Camber, and Twist: Maximum of
plus/minus 1/8 inch or length divided by 360, whichever is greater, but not more than 1/4
inch.
Unless otherwise indicated on drawings, provide:
a. Wash or slope of 1:12 on exterior horizontal surfaces.
b. Drips on projecting components, wherever possible.
c. Raised fillets at back of sills and at ends to be built in.
Reinforcement: Provide reinforcement as required to withstand handling and structural
stresses; comply with ACI 318.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150.
1. For Mortar: Type I or II, except Type III may be used in cold weather.
B.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; granite, quartz, or limestone.
C.
Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, except for gradation; natural or manufactured sands.
D.
Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M.
E.
Water: Potable.
F.
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615/A615M deformed bars, galvanized or epoxy coated.
G.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A185/A185M, galvanized or epoxy coated.
H.
Embedded Anchors, Dowels, and Inserts: Type 304 stainless steel, of type and size as required
for conditions.
I.
Mortar: Portland cement-lime, as specified in Section 040511; do not use masonry cement.
J.
Sealant: As specified in Section 079005.
K.
Cleaner: General-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout stains,
efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or
damaging masonry surfaces; approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and by
cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install cast stone components in conjunction with masonry, complying with requirements of
Section 042000.
B.
Mechanically anchor cast stone units indicated; set remainder in mortar.
C.
Setting:
1. Drench cast stone components with clear, running water immediately before installation.
2. Set units in a full bed of mortar unless otherwise indicated.
3. Fill vertical joints with mortar.
4. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots completely with mortar or non-shrink grout.
D.
Joints: Make all joints 3/8 inch, except as otherwise detailed.
1. Rake mortar joints 3/4 inch for pointing.
2. Remove excess mortar from face of stone before pointing joints.
3. Point joints with mortar in layers 3/8 inch thick and tool to a slight concave profile.
4. Leave the following joints open for sealant:
a. Head joints in top courses, including copings, parapets, cornices, sills, and steps.
b. Joints in projecting units.
c. Joints between rigidly anchored units, including soffits, panels, and column covers.
d. Joints below lugged sills and stair treads.
e. Joints below ledge and relieving angles.
f.
Joints labeled "expansion joint".
E.
Sealant Joints: Install sealants as specified in Section 079005.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
047200 - 2
CAST STONE MASONRY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
F.
For Construction
09-24-13
Replace: Replace pieces with chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in
direct daylight at 20 feet.
3.02 CLEANING
A.
Repair chips and other surface damage noticeable when viewed in direct daylight at 20 feet.
1. Repair with matching touchup material provided by the manufacturer and in accordance
with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Repair methods and results subject to Architect 's approval.
3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Protect completed work from damage.
B.
Clean, repair, or restore damaged or mortar-splashed work to condition of new work.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
047200 - 3
CAST STONE MASONRY
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 053100
STEEL DECKING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Roof deck.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
B.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
C.
AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; American Welding Society; 2008.
D.
SDI (DM) - Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks;
Steel Deck Institute; 2007.
E.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); The Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate deck plan, support locations, projections, openings, pertinent details,
and accessories.
C.
Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties, and
finishes.
D.
Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within
the previous 12 months.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with
minimum three years of experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation.
B.
Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Steel Deck:
1. Canam Steel Corporation: www.canam-steeljoists.ws.
2. Nucor-Vulcraft Group: www.vulcraft.com.
3. Wheeling Corrugating Co: www.wheelingcorrugating.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 STEEL DECK
A.
Roof Deck: Non-composite type, fluted steel sheet:
1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, Structural Steel (SS) Grade 33/230, with
G90/Z275 galvanized coating.
2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 22 gage.
3. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch.
4. Profile: Fluted; SDI WR.
5. Side Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened.
6. End Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened.
2.03 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
053100 - 1
STEEL DECKING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Fasteners: Galvanized hardened steel, self tapping.
C.
Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick.
D.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of
authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Flute Closures: Closed cell foam rubber, 1 inch thick; profiled to fit tight to the deck.
2.04 FABRICATED DECK ACCESSORIES
A.
Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Metal closure strips, wet concrete stops, and cover plates, 22
gage thick sheet steel; of profile and size as indicated; finished same as deck.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align
and level.
B.
On steel supports provide minimum 1-1/2 inch bearing.
C.
Fasten deck to steel support members at ends and intermediate supports at 12 inches on
center maximum, parallel with the deck flute and at each transverse flute using methods
specified.
1. Welding: Use fusion welds through weld washers.
D.
At mechanically fastened male/female side laps fasten at 24 inches on center maximum.
E.
Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3.
F.
At deck openings from 6 inches to 18 inches in size, provide 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch steel angle
reinforcement. Place angles perpendicular to flutes; extend minimum two flutes beyond each
side of opening and fusion weld to deck at each flute.
G.
At openings between deck and walls, columns, and openings, provide sheet steel closures and
angle flashings to close openings.
H.
Close openings above walls and partitions perpendicular to deck flutes with single row of foam
cell closures.
I.
Place metal cant strips in position and mechanically attach.
J.
Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned
areas, and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
053100 - 2
STEEL DECKING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 054000
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Formed steel stud exterior wall framing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 042001 - Masonry Veneer: Veneer masonry supported by wall stud metal framing.
B.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Wall sheathing.
C.
Section 072100 - Thermal Insulation: Insulation within framing members.
D.
Section 092116 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Lightweight, non-load bearing metal stud
framing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AISI SG02-1 - North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members; American Iron and Steel Institute; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced SG-971)
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
D.
ASTM C955 - Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs,
Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products
and Metal Plaster Bases; 2011c.
E.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
F.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish,
product criteria, limitations .
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring
special attention .
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional
Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in Texas.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of experience.
C.
Provide materials testing and associated testing reports for cold formed metal framing to include
periodic visual inspection of the connections and sizes to be as per plans.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Framing:
1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC; Product ____: www.clarkdietrich.com.
2. Marino: www.marinoware.com.
3. United States Steel .
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Framing Connectors and Accessories:
1. Same manufacturer as metal framing.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
054000 - 1
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
For Construction
09-24-13
Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FRAMING SYSTEM
A.
Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips,
fittings, reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system.
B.
Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:
1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members
according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members.
2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified
design loads for project conditions within required limits.
3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes.
4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:
a. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/180 of span.
b. Design non-axial loadbearing framing to accommodate not less than 1/2 in vertical
deflection.
5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue
stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic
day/night temperature ranges.
6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members,
and clearances of intended openings.
C.
Shop fabricate framing system to the greatest extent possible.
D.
Deliver to site in largest practical sections.
2.03 FRAMING MATERIALS
A.
Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched
web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height.
1. Gage and depth: As indicated on the drawings.
2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M G90/Z275 coating.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions
encountered; finish to match framing components.
B.
Plates, Gussets, Clips: Formed Sheet Steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;
finish to match framing components.
C.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Water-Resistive Barrier: As specified in Section 072500.
2.05 FASTENERS
A.
Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM
A153/A153M.
B.
Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated.
C.
Anchorage Devices: Power actuated.
D.
Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF STUDS
A.
Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
B.
Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum
24 inches on center.
C.
Place studs at 16 inches on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side
of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
054000 - 2
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
D.
For Construction
09-24-13
Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door
and window jambs.
E.
Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted.
F.
Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design
requirements.
G.
Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection.
H.
Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing.
I.
Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls.
J.
Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent
stud rotation.
K.
Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.
3.02 WALL SHEATHING
A.
Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using self-tapping screws.
1. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and
ends.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
054000 - 3
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated steel items.
B.
Prefabricated ladders and ship ladders.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI A14.3 - American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed -- Safety Requirements; 2008.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
C.
ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated,
Welded and Seamless; 2012.
D.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
E.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
F.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates; 2012.
G.
ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength; 2010.
H.
ASTM A325M - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa
Tensile Strength (Metric); 2009.
I.
ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2010a.
J.
AWS A2.4 - Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination;
American Welding Society; 2012.
K.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.
L.
SSPC-Paint 15 - Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004).
M. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size
and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details
where applicable.
1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld
lengths.
C.
Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS
qualification within the previous 12 months.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS - STEEL
A.
Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M.
B.
Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.
C.
Plates: ASTM A283.
D.
Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.
E.
Fasteners: ________.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
055000 - 1
METAL FABRICATIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
F.
Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM
A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components.
G.
Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1M; type required for materials being welded.
H.
Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
I.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with
VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.
2.02 FABRICATION
A.
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site.
B.
Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.
C.
Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt
tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.
D.
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings are to be avoided whenever possible: Flush countersunk
screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where
specifically noted otherwise.
E.
Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related
components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted
otherwise.
2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS
A.
Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime
paint finish.
1. Side Rails: 3/8 x 2 inches members spaced at 24 inches.
2. Rungs: one inch diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches on center.
3. Space rungs 7 inches from wall surface.
B.
Architectural canopy details, including exposed bolts with galvanized finish.
C.
Bollards: Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, as detailed; prime paint finish.
D.
Lintels: As detailed; galvanized finish.
E.
Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings, Wall Openings, and _____: Channel sections;
prime paint finish.
2.04 PREFABRICATED LADDERS
2.05 FINISHES - STEEL
A.
Prime paint all steel items.
1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete or masonry and items specified
for pre-primed finish.
B.
Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP 3.
C.
Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing.
D.
Prime Painting: One coat.
E.
Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating.
F.
Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M
requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.
B.
Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into
concrete or embedded in masonry.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
055000 - 2
METAL FABRICATIONS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects.
B.
Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until
completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.
C.
Field weld components indicated .
D.
Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
E.
Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
F.
After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except
surfaces to be in contact with concrete.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
055000 - 3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Non-structural dimension lumber framing.
B.
Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.
C.
Sheathing.
D.
Underlayment.
E.
Roofing nailers.
F.
Roofing cant strips.
G.
Preservative treated wood materials.
H.
Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
I.
Communications and electrical room mounting boards.
J.
Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.
K.
Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.
L.
Roof sheathing with factory applied water-resistive barrier.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AFPA (WFCM) - Wood Frame Construction Manual for One- and Two-Family Dwellings;
American Forest and Paper Association; 2012.
B.
ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware; 2009.
C.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
D.
AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure
Processes; American Wood Protection Association; 2003.
E.
AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood
Protection Association; 2010.
F.
PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2009.
G.
PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
(Department of Commerce); 2005.
H.
SPIB (GR) - Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no
grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the
specified requirements.
3. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review,
American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service
for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.
C.
Provide wood harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site; see Section 016000 for
requirements for locally-sourced products.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
061000 - 1
ROUGH CARPENTRY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS
A.
Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB).
B.
Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
C.
Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
D.
Stud Framing (2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):
1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules.
2. Grade: No. 2.
E.
Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring:
1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
2.03 EXPOSED BOARDS
A.
Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of
grade stamping.
B.
Moisture Content: Kiln-dry (15 percent maximum).
C.
Surfacing: S4S.
D.
Species: Western Cedar.
E.
Grade: No. 2, 2 Common, or Construction.
2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Roof Sheathing: APA PRP-108, Structural I Rated Sheathing, Exterior Exposure Class, and as
follows:
1. Span Rating: 24/0.
2. Thickness: 1/2 inch, nominal.
B.
Wall Sheathing: Plywood, PS 1, Grade C-D, Exposure I.
C.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density
fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or
less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
D.
Other Applications:
1. Plywood Concealed From View But Located Within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C
Plugged or better, Exterior grade.
2. Plywood Exposed to View But Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better.
3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better.
2.05 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners and Anchors:
1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity
and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
B.
Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. Provide ________
manufactured by ____________.
C.
Sill Gasket on Top of Foundation Wall: 1/4 inch thick, plate width, closed cell plastic foam from
continuous rolls.
D.
Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 076200.
2.06 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System
for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific
applications.
1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with
AWPA standards.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
061000 - 2
ROUGH CARPENTRY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Preservative Treatment:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc; Product ____: www.wolmanizedwood.com.
b. Viance, LLC; Product ____: www.treatedwood.com.
c. Osmose, Inc; Product ____: www.osmose.com.
d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
C.
Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B,
Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention.
1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing.
3. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete.
4. Treat lumber less than 18 inches above grade.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous
over top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal.
B.
Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket
cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts.
C.
Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Select material sizes to minimize waste.
B.
Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
C.
Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately
after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.
3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION
A.
Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would
lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.
B.
Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to
maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and
installation of permanent bracing.
C.
Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.
D.
Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and
spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame
Construction Manual.
E.
Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that
are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.
F.
Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs.
3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS
A.
Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,
specialty items, and trim.
B.
In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required
by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top
story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of
solid wood blocking.
C.
Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:
1. Cabinets and shelf supports.
2. Wall brackets.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
061000 - 3
ROUGH CARPENTRY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
For Construction
09-24-13
Handrails.
Grab bars.
Towel and bath accessories.
Wall-mounted door stops.
Chalkboards and marker boards.
Wall paneling and trim.
Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.
3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY
A.
Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and
roofing assembly installation.
B.
Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form
corners by alternating lapping side members.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS
A.
Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with
ends staggered and over firm bearing.
1. At long edges use sheathing clips where joints occur between roof framing members.
2. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted.
B.
Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm
bearing and staggered, using nails, screws, or staples.
1. Use plywood or other acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than 96
inches, measured horizontally.
2. Place water-resistive barrier horizontally over wall sheathing, weather lapping edges and
ends.
C.
Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with
edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into
studs in field of board.
1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly.
2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board
parallel to studs.
3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.
3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT
A.
Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts,
complying with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
061000 - 4
ROUGH CARPENTRY
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 071113
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Bituminous dampproofing.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing; 2011.
B.
ASTM D1187/D1187M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as
Protective Coatings for Metal; 1997 (Reapproved 2011).
C.
ASTM D1227 - Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating for
Roofing; 1995 (Reapproved 2007).
D.
ASTM D2822/D2822M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Containing;
2005 (Reapproved 2011)e1.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
______; Product ____.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Karnak Corporation: www.karnakcorp.com.
2. Mar-Flex Systems, Inc: www.mar-flex.com.
3. Seaboard Asphalt Products Company: www.seaboardasphalt.com.
4. W.R. Meadows, Inc: www.wrmeadows.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 DAMPPROOFING PRODUCTS
A.
Bituminous Dampproofing: Cold-applied water-based emulsion; asphalt with mineral colloid or
chemical emulsifying agent; with or without fiber reinforcement; asbestos-free; suitable for
application on vertical and horizontal surfaces.
1. Composition - Vertical Application: ASTM D1227 Type III or ASTM D1187 Type I.
2. Composition - Horizontal and Low-Slope Application: ASTM D1227 Type II or III.
3. VOC Content: Not more than permitted by local, State, and federal regulations.
4. Applied Thickness: 1/16 inch, minimum, wet film.
B.
Primers, Mastics, and Related Materials: Type as recommended by dampproofing
manufacturer.
2.03 COLD ASPHALTIC MATERIALS
A.
Bitumen: Emulsified asphalt, ASTM D1227; with fiber reinforcement other than asbestos (Type
II).
B.
Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, compatible with substrate.
C.
Sealing Mastic: Asphalt roof cement, ASTM D2822, Type I.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify substrate surfaces are durable, free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
dampproofing system.
C.
Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive dampproofing are securely installed.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
071113 - 1
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive dampproofing.
B.
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive dampproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C.
Do not apply dampproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.
D.
Apply mastic to seal penetrations, small cracks, or minor honeycomb in substrate.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Foundation Walls: Apply two coats of dampproofing.
B.
Apply bitumen with mop.
C.
Apply bitumen in one coat, continuous and uniform, at a rate of ____ gal/100 sq ft per coat.
D.
Seal items projecting through dampproofing surface with mastic. Seal watertight.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071113 - 2
BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 071300
SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sheet membrane waterproofing.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 076200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal parapet, coping, and counterflashing.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic ElastomersTension; 2006a.
B.
ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics; 1998 (Reapproved
2010).
C.
ASTM D624 - Standard Test Method For Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2012).
D.
ASTM D903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds; 1998
(Reapproved 2010).
E.
ASTM D1876 - Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test); 2008,
F.
ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2011.
G.
ASTM D2581 - Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastics Molding and Extrusion
Materials; 2009.
H.
ASTM D5385 - Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing
Membranes; 1993 (Reapproved 2006).
I.
ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods For Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2010.
J.
ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth
Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover; 2008a.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data for membrane, surface conditioner, and flexible flashings.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.
D.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in FT 1463
Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years experience.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial
Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to FT 1463
Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS
A.
Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing: Use at __________.
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Flexible rubberized self-adhesive-self sealing water barrier membrane; Product FWBM.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
071300 - 1
SHEET WATERPROOFING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
B.
For Construction
09-24-13
Grace Construction Products Perm-A-Barrier Wall Membrane
Other Acceptable Rubber Manufacturers:
1. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A.
Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Membrane:
1. Thickness: 60 mil (0.060 inch).
2. Sheet Width: 36 inches.
3. Tensile Strength:
a. Membrane: 325 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM
D412 Method A, using die C and at spindle-separation rate of 2 inches per minute.
4. Elongation at Break: 300 percent, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412.
5. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM
E96/E96M.
6. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected when tested according to ASTM D1970 at minus
20 degrees F, 180 degree bend on 1 inch mandrel.
7. Peel Strength: 7 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D903.
8. Lap Adhesion Strength: 5 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM
D1876.
9. Puncture Resistance: 50 pounds, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM E154.
10. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with
ASTM D570, 24 hour immersion.
11. Hydrostatic Resistance: Resists the weight of 200 feet when tested according to ASTM
D5385.
12. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane
manufacturer.
13. Manufacturers:
a. Grace Construction Products; Product ____: www.na.graceconstruction.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Sheet Waterproofing - General: ____ membrane, adhesive bonded.
C.
Rubber Membrane: Butylene, conforming to ASTM D 2581EPDM conforming to ASTM D 4637
Type I.
1. Formulated for seaming by solvent weldingcontact adhesive.
2. Tensile Strength: 400, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412.
3. Ultimate Elongation: 225 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412.
D.
Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
E.
Thinner and Cleaner: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with sheet
membrane.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer.
B.
Counterflashings: Galvanized steel sheet as specified in Section 076200.
C.
Perm-A-Barrier Surface Conditioner is a water based surface conditioner specifically formulated
to promote good initial adhesion and excellent long-term adhesion of the Perm-ABarrier Wall
Membrane to concrete, masonry, exterior gypsum and wood surfaces. The VOC content is 125
g/L.
D.
Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer is a high-tack water based primer for use with Perm-ABarrier Wall
Membrane and Perm-A-Barrier Low Temperature Membrane on cementious substrates and
exterior wallboard.
E.
Bitutheneª Primer B2 is a solvent-based primer specially formulated for use with PermA-Barrier Wall Membranes on “green” concrete or damp substrates. The VOC content is 440
g/L.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071300 - 2
SHEET WATERPROOFING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
F.
Bituthene Primer B2 LVC is a solvent based, low VOC primer specially formulated for the use
with Perm-A-Barrier Wall Membrane on green and damp surfaces. The VOC content is <200
g/L.
G.
Bituthene Mastic is a rubberized asphalt based mastic used for sealing all membrane
terminations. Its VOC content is 200 g/L.
H.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of
waterproofing system.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.
B.
Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer.
C.
Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by
manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry.
3.03 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE
A.
Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles.
C.
Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a
mechanical roller to encourage full contact bond.
D.
Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3
inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.
E.
Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints
are static or dynamic.
F.
Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams.
G.
Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal
watertight to membrane.
H.
Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install
counterflashing over all exposed edges.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood
testing.
B.
Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks.
C.
If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as
directed by Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building.
D.
When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071300 - 3
SHEET WATERPROOFING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 071410
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
Materials and installation of waterproof air barrier over vertical above grade concrete walls,
concrete masonry walls, and wall sheathing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A.
Manufacturer's specifications, details and product data.
B.
Samples for approval as directed by architect or owner.
C.
Manufacturer's standard warranty.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
Proprietary Specifications
1. AATCC (American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists), Test Method 127,
Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test
2. Building Code Standards
a. SBCCI PST & ESI Evaluation Guide on Floor, Wall, and Roof Systems (Testing for
Moisture Protection Barriers), Evaluation Guide 119.
b. ICC Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive
Barriers over Exterior Sheathing, AC 212
c. CCMC Technical Guide on Air Barriers
3. ASTM Standards
a. C 297Test Method for Tensile Strength of Flat Sandwich Constructions in Flatwise
Plane
b. C 1177Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing
c. C 1396Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
d. D 522Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings
e. D 1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous
1) Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam
(a) Protection
f.
D 2247Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity
g. D 3273Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior
Coatings in an Environmental Chamber
h. D 4541Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion
Testers
i.
E 72Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction
j.
E 84Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
k. E 96Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials
l.
E 283Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen.
m. E 331Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and
Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference
n. E 1233Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls
and Doors by Cyclical Static Air Pressure Differential
o. 15. E 2178 Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials
p. 16. E 2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier
1) Assemblies
4. APA Engineered Wood
a. E 30 Residential and Commercial Construction Guide
5. Gypsum Association
a. GA-600Fire Resistance Design Manual
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
071410 - 1
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
6.
For Construction
09-24-13
b. GA-253Recommended Specifications for the Application of Gypsum Sheathing
c. GA-254Fire-Resistant Gypsum Sheathing
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE)
a. 2005 ASHRAE Handbook--Fundamentals
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural (Wind and Axial Loads)
1. Design for maximum allowable deflection normal to the plane of the wall: L/240
2. Design for Wind Load in conformance with code requirements.
3. Moisture Control:
a. Prevent the accumulation of water in the wall assembly and behind the exterior wall
cladding:
1) Minimize condensation within the assembly.
2) Drain water directly to the exterior where it is likely to penetrate components in
the wall assembly (windows and doors, for example).
3) Provide corrosion resistant flashing to direct water to the exterior in accordance
with code requirements, including: above window and door heads, beneath
window and door sills, at roof/wall intersections, decks, intersections of lower
walls with higher walls, and at the base of the wall.
4. Air Barrier Continuity: provide continuous air barrier system of compatible air barrier
components.
5. Substrates
a. Concrete Masonry Units: provide normal weight units with flush joints (struck flush
with the surface) and allow for a minimum of 2 coats of the air barrier material, or a
cementitious parge coat to fill and level irregular surfaces and 1 coat of the air barrier
material, prior to the air barrier application such that a void and pinhole free air barrier
surface is achieved.
6. Mechanical Ventilation: maintain pressurization and indoor humidity levels in accordance
with recommendations of ASHRAE (see 2005 ASHRAE Handbook-Fundamentals).
B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
1. Manufacturer requirements
a. Manufacturer of exterior wall waterproof air barrier materials for a minimum of 25
years in North America.
b. ISO 9001:2000 Certified Quality System and ISO 14001:2004 Certified Environmental
Management System
2. Contractor requirements
a. Knowledgeable in the proper use and handling of Sto materials.
b. Employ skilled mechanics who are experienced and knowledgeable in waterproofing
and air barrier application, and familiar with the requirements of the specified work.
c. Provide the proper equipment, manpower and supervision on the job-site to install the
system in compliance with Sto's published specifications and the project plans &
specifications.
C.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
1. Deliver all materials in their original sealed containers bearing manufacturer's name and
identification of product.
2. Protect coatings (pail products) from freezing temperatures and temperatures in excess of
90° F (32° C). Store away from direct sunlight.
3. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
4. Maintain ambient and surface temperatures above 40° F (4° C) during application and
drying period, minimum 24 hours after application of waterproof air barrier.
5. Provide supplementary heat for installation in temperatures less than 40° F (4° C) or if
surface temperature is likely to fall below 40° F (4° C). (Note: surface temperature is lower
than air temperature at night).
6. Provide protection of surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces from application of
materials.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071410 - 2
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
D.
For Construction
09-24-13
COORDINATION/SCHEDULING
1. (The work in this section requires close coordination with related sections and trades.
Sequence work to provide protection of construction materials from weather deterioration)
2. Coordinate installation of foundation waterproofing, roofing membrane, windows, doors
and other wall penetrations to provide a continuous air barrier.
3. Provide protection of rough openings before installing windows, doors, and other
4. penetrations through the wall.
5. Provide sill flashing to direct water to the exterior before windows and doors are installed.
6. Install window and door head flashing immediately after windows and doors are installed.
7. Install diverter flashings wherever water can enter the assembly to direct water to the
exterior.
8. WARRANTY
9. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Sto Corp.
B.
WATERPROOF AIR BARRIER
1. StoGuard® Components
a. 1. Sto Gold Fill® - ready mixed flexible trowel or spray applied air barrier material.
b. 2. Sto EmeraldCoat® - ready-mixed flexible spray or roller applied air barrier material
and
1) waterproof coating.
2) 3. StoGuard® Rapid Seal™ - moisture cure elastomeric air barrier material and
waterproof
(a) coating/sealant.
3) 4. StoGuard® Tape - self adhering rubberized asphalt tape with polyester fabric
facing.
4) 5. StoGuard® Primer - rubber resin emulsion primer for use with StoGuard®
Tape to
(a) enhance adhesion and allow installation down to 35º F (1.7ºC).
5) 6. StoGuard® Mesh - nominal 4.2 oz/sq. yd. (142 g/m2), self-adhesive, flexible,
symmetrical,
(a) interlaced glass fiber reinforcing mesh, with alkaline resistant coating for
compatibility with
(b) Sto materials.
6) 7. StoGuard® Fabric - non-woven integrally reinforced cloth reinforcement.
(a) 8. StoGuard® RediCornerTM - non-woven integrally reinforced pre-formed
cloth
(1) reinforcement.
C.
MIXING
1. Mix materials with a clean, rust-free electric drill and paddle.
2. Do not dilute materials with water or add other ingredients.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Inspect concrete and concrete masonry surfaces for:
1. Contamination - algae, chalkiness, dirt, dust, efflorescence, form oil, fungus, grease,
mildew or other foreign substances.
2. Surface absorption and chalkiness.
3. Cracks - measure crack width and record location of cracks.
4. Damage and deterioration.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071410 - 3
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
5.
6.
7.
8.
For Construction
09-24-13
Moisture content and moisture damage - use a moisture meter to determine if the surface
is dry enough to receive the air and moisture barrier and record any areas of moisture
damage or excess moisture.
Compliance with specification tolerances - record areas that are out of tolerance (greater
than 1/4 inch in 8-0 feet [6 mm in 2438 mm] deviation in plane).
Inspect sheathing application for compliance with applicable requirement:
a. Exterior gypsum sheathing - GA-253.
b. Exterior Grade and Exposure I wood based sheathing - APA E30.
c. Glass mat faced gypsum sheathing in compliance with ASTM C 1177 - Consult
manufacturer's published recommendations.
d. Cementitious sheathing - Consult manufacturer's published recommendations.
Report deviations from the requirements of project specifications or other conditions that
might adversely affect the waterproof air barrier installation. Do not start work until
deviations are corrected.
B.
SURFACE PREPARATION
1. Remove surface contaminants and replace damaged sheathing.
2. Spot surface defects in sheathing with joint treatment material.
3. Repair cracks, spalls, or other damge in concrete or concrete masonry surfaces.
4. Prime surfaces to receive StoGuard® Tape.
C.
INSTALLATION
1. Install waterproof air barrier in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Rough opening protection (select one):
1) a. Sto Gold Fill® with StoGuard® Mesh
2) b. Sto EmeraldCoat® with StoGuard® RediCornerTM and StoGuard®
(a) Fabric
(1) c. StoGuard® Tape with StoGuard® Primer
(2) StoGuard® RapidSeal™
(3) Sheathing joints, corners (select one):
(4) a. Sto Gold Fill® with StoGuard® Mesh
(5) b. Sto EmeraldCoat® with StoGuard® Fabric
3) 3. Cracks in CMU (select one):
(a) a. Sto Gold Fill® with StoGuard® Mesh
(b) b. Sto EmeraldCoat® with StoGuard® Fabric
(c) c. StoGuard® Tape with StoGuard® Primer
(d) d. StoGuard® RapidSeal™
4) Waterproof top coat over rough opening protection, joints, corners, crack
treatment:
(a) Sto EmeraldCoat®
5) Air barrier connection to dissimilar materials and secondary seal beneath
expansion
(a) and control joints:
(1) StoGuard® Tape with StoGuard® Primer
3.02 1.07
A.
This specification is intended for use by the design/construction professional and user of Sto
products to assist in developing project specifications for the application of StoGuard®
Waterproof Air Barrier - Sto EmeraldCoat® to vertical above grade concrete, concrete masonry,
and sheathed wall construction. StoGuard® Waterproof Air Barrier - Sto EmeraldCoat® is
designed for use behind portland cement stucco with metal lath. A slip sheet, typically code
approved building paper or felt, may be required between Sto EmeraldCoat® and metal lath,
depending on local code requirements (refer to Sto Details). Sto EmeraldCoat® can also be
used beneath claddings such as brick, vinyl, wood and fiber cement siding. It should not be
used as part of an adhesively fastened exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS). For EIFS
claddings see StoTherm® NExT Specifications A100G, E100G, and L100G.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071410 - 4
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
For Construction
09-24-13
StoGuard® functions as an air barrier component and secondary waterproof barrier in wall
assemblies. The secondary moisture protection provided by StoGuard® protects walls
against moisture damage from rain during the construction process and in the event of a
breach in the wall cladding while in service. It is not intended to correct faulty workmanship
such as the absence or improper integration of flashing with the cladding, nor is it intended
to correct other defective components of construction such as windows that leak into the
wall assembly. Flashing should always be integrated with the cladding to direct water to the
exterior, not into the wall assembly, particularly at potential leak sources such as windows.
a. An air barrier system minimizes the risk of condensation within the building envelope
by eliminating mass transfer of warm moisture laden air into the wall assembly to a
cold surface where it can condense. A complete air barrier system consists of
individual air barrier components and the connections between them. The air barrier
components must be continuous to become an effective air barrier system. The
design/construction professional must take material compatibility and construction
sequencing into account when designing an "air tight" assembly to ensure continuity
and long term durability. The effects of air tightness on mechanical ventilation should
also be included in the overall project evaluation.
b. The function of an air barrier should not be confused with that of a vapor retarder. A
vapor retarder is placed in the wall to resist differential vapor pressures. The air
barrier is designed to resist the structural live loads induced by air pressure
difference. Generally a vapor retarder is placed on the warm side of the wall.
Specifically, it is placed on the interior side of the insulation in cold climates and on
the exterior side of the insulation in warm humid climates to minimize condensation
within the wall assembly. A vapor retarder may not be necessary depending on the
wall components, the range of temperature/humidity conditions inside and outside,
and the mechanical ventilation of the building. A vapor retarder should not be used on
the interior side of walls in warm humid climates. If a vapor retarding air barrier is
desired refer to Sto Specification A1000V.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071410 - 5
FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 071900
WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Water repellents applied to exterior masonry surfaces.
B.
Concrete etching.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 079005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide product description.
C.
Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention; cautionary procedures required during application.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in
this section with minimum three years documented experience.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A.
Prepare a representative surface 36 by 36 inch in size using specified materials and preparation
and application methods on surfaces identical to those to be coated; approved mock-up
constitutes standard for workmanship.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acrylic Water Repellents:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals; Product ____: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
2. Textured Coatings of America, Inc; Product ____: www.texcote.com.
B.
Silane/Siloxane Water Repellents:
1. Tnemec Company, Inc; Product ____: www.tnemec.com.
2. BASF Construction Chemicals; Product ____: www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Water Repellent: Non-glossy, colorless, penetrating, water-vapor-permeable, non-yellowing
sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged.
1. Applications: Vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces.
2. Number of Coats: Two.
3. Maintains dry appearance when wetted.
4. Products: Water-based acrylic.
a. BASF Construction Chemicals; White Roc W.
b. Textured Coatings of America, Inc; Rainstopper 700 Acry-Cote. [VOC < 200 g/L]
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter
detrimental to application of water repellent.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best
results.
B.
Do not start work until masonry mortar substrate is cured a minimum of 60 days.
C. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
071900 - 1
WATER REPELLENTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
D.
Remove oil and foreign substances with a chemical solvent that will not affect water repellent.
E.
Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry.
3.03 APPLICATION
A.
Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and
application methods recommended as producing the best results.
B.
Apply two coats, minimum.
C.
Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by water
repellent manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
071900 - 2
WATER REPELLENTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation
2. Cellular-glass insulation.
3. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.
4. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation.
5. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in[ cavity walls and] masonry cells.
2. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for foam-plastic board sheathing over wood or steel framing.
3. [Section 071326 "Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing"] [Section 071353 "Elastomeric
Sheet Waterproofing"] [Section 071354 "Thermoplastic Sheet Waterproofing"] [Section
071413 "Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing"] [Section 071416 "Cold
Fluid-Applied Waterproofing"] for insulated drainage panels installed with waterproofing.
4. [Section 072413 "Polymer-Based Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)"] [Section
072419 "Water-Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)"] for insulation
specified as part of these systems.
5. [Section 075113 "Built-up Asphalt Roofing"] [Section 075116 "Built-up Coal Tar Roofing"]
[Section 075216 "Atactic-Polypropylene (APP) Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing"]
[Section 075216 "Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Membrane
Roofing"] [Section 075316 "Chlorosulfonate-Polyethylene (CSPE) Roofing"] [Section
075323 "Ethylene-Propylene-Diene-Monomer (EPDM) Roofing"] [Section 075416
"Ethylene Interpolymer (KEE) Roofing"] [Section 075419 Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing]
[Section 075423 "Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing"] [Section 075552 "Modified
Bituminous Protected Membrane Roofing"] [Section 075556 "Fluid-Applied Protected
Membrane Roofing"]" [and] "[Section 075700 "Coated Foamed Roofing"] for insulation
specified as part of roofing construction.
6. Section 078446 "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for insulation installed as part of a
perimeter fire-resistive joint system.
7. [Section 092116.23 "Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies"] [Section 092300 "Gypsum
Plastering"] [Section 092400 "Portland Cement Plastering"] [Section 092613 "Gypsum
Veneer Plastering"] for installation in wood- and metal-framed assemblies of insulation
specified by referencing this Section.
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified
testing agency, for each product.
B.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from [ICC-ES] <Insert applicable
model code organization>.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
072100 - 1
THERMAL INSULATION
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B.
Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project
site before installation time.
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each
area of construction.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION
A.
Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type I, [Class 1] [or] [Class 2],
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per
ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).
c. Rmax, Inc.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
B.
Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.
2.02 CELLULAR-GLASS INSULATION
A.
Cellular-Glass Insulation: ASTM C 552, [Type I (flat block)] [Type IV (board) faced on both
sides with manufacturer's special kraft-paper sheets laminated to glass block with asphalt].
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation.
b. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
B.
Asphalt Coating for Cellular-Glass Block Insulation: Cutback asphalt or asphalt emulsion of
type recommended by manufacturer of cellular-glass block insulation.
2.03 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following]:
1. CertainTeed Corporation.
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.
3. Johns Manville.
4. Knauf Insulation.
5. Owens Corning.
6. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
B.
Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than <Insert number> percent.
C.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E
136 for combustion characteristics.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072100 - 2
THERMAL INSULATION
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
D.
Polypropylene-Scrim-Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II
(non-reflective faced), Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category
1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
E.
Kraft-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type II (non-reflective faced), Class
C (faced surface not rated for flame propagation); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier).
F.
Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced),
Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a
vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
G.
Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced), Class B
(faced surface with a flame-propagation resistance of 0.12 W/sq. cm); Category 1 (membrane
is a vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
H.
Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed, rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit
between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces
and vented eaves.
I.
Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no
formaldehyde.
2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than
0.05-ppm formaldehyde.
2.04 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION
A.
Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, [Type I (materials applied
with liquid adhesive; suitable for either exposed or enclosed applications),] [Type II (materials
containing a dry adhesive activated by water during installation; intended only for enclosed or
covered applications),] [Type III (materials containing an adhesive mixed with water during
application; intended for application on attic floors),] chemically treated for flame-resistance,
processing, and handling characteristics.
1. Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled
content not less than <Insert number> percent.
2.05 SPRAY POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION
A.
Closed-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, with maximum
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
a. BASF Corporation.
b. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.
c. Dow Chemical Company (The).
d. ERSystems, Inc.
e. Gaco Western Inc.
f.
Henry Company.
g. NCFI; Division of Barnhardt Mfg. Co.
h. SWD Urethane Company.
i.
Volatile Free, Inc.
j.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
2. Minimum density of 1.5 lb/cu. ft. (24 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 6.2 deg F x h x sq.
ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (43 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
B.
Open-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: Spray-applied polyurethane foam using water as a
blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,
respectively, per ASTM E 84.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072100 - 3
THERMAL INSULATION
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
For Construction
09-24-13
a. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.
b. Demilec (USA) LLC.
c. Gaco Western Inc.
d. Icynene Inc.
e. SWD Urethane Company.
f.
<Insert manufacturer's name>.
Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft. (6.4 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 3.4 deg F x h x sq.
ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (24 K x m/W at 24 deg C).
2.06 INSULATION FASTENERS
A.
Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of
holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in
place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of
the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following]:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers.
b. Gemco; Spindle Type.
c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
2. Plate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches
(50 mm) square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in
diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
B.
Adhesively Attached, Angle-Shaped, Spindle-Type Anchors: Angle welded to projecting spindle;
capable of holding insulation of specified thickness securely in position indicated with
self-locking washer in place.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of
the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following]:
a. Gemco; 90-Degree Insulation Hangers.
b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
2. Angle: Formed from 0.030-inch- (0.762-mm-) thick, perforated, galvanized carbon-steel
sheet with each leg 2 inches (50 mm) square.
3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low-carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in
diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
C.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge for increased stiffness, sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place, but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square or in diameter.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of
the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following]:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; [RC150] [SC150].
b. Gemco; [Dome-Cap] [R-150] [S-150].
c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
2. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure
permanent retention of cap in the following locations:
a. Crawl spaces.
b. Ceiling plenums.
c. Attic spaces.
d. Where indicated.
e. <Insert location>.
D.
Insulation Standoff: Spacer fabricated from galvanized mild-steel sheet for fitting over spindle of
insulation anchor to maintain air space of [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [3 inches (76
mm)] between face of insulation and substrate to which anchor is attached.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072100 - 4
THERMAL INSULATION
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
E.
For Construction
09-24-13
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of
the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following]:
a. Gemco; Clutch Clip.
b. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to
substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of
the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following]:
a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive.
b. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.
c. <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation[ or vapor retarders, including
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders,] or that interfere with insulation
attachment.
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION
A.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610
mm) o.c. both ways on inside face, and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of
insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions.
Press units firmly against inside substrates.
1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties
designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."
B.
Cellular-Glass Board Insulation: Install with closely fitting joints using [adhesive pad] [serrated
trowel] attachment method according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Seal joints between units by applying adhesive, mastic, or
sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in
completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
manufacturer.
C.
Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members
according to the following requirements:
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more
than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit
between ends.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072100 - 5
THERMAL INSULATION
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
For Construction
09-24-13
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated
for or protected from contact with insulation.
Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at
vented eaves.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support
unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation
to flanges of metal studs.
For wood-framed construction, install blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling
flanges to sides of framing members.
b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent
blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.
Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and
seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward [exterior of construction] [interior
of construction] [as indicated on Drawings].
b. Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed [toward areas of high humidity] [as
indicated on Drawings] <Insert location>.
D.
Loose-Fill Insulation: Apply according to ASTM C 1015 and manufacturer's written instructions.
Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density,
but do not compact excessively.
1. For cellulosic-fiber loose-fill insulation, comply with CIMA's Bulletin #2, "Standard Practice
for Installing Cellulose Insulation."
E.
Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.
F.
Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required
to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed insulation[ and vapor retarders] from damage due to harmful weather
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures
where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072100 - 6
THERMAL INSULATION
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 072400
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Composite wall and soffit cladding of rigid insulation and reinforced finish coating ("Class PB").
B.
Incidental uses of same finish coating applied directly to concrete and masonry.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM B117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2011.
B.
ASTM C1397 - Standard Practice for Application of Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish
Systems (EIFS) and EIFS with Drainage; 2009.
C.
ASTM D968 - Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling
Abrasive; 2005 (Reapproved 2010).
D.
ASTM D2247 - Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative
Humidity; 2011.
E.
ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of
Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2012.
F.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2012.
G.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
H.
ASTM E2485 - Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and
Finish Systems (EIFS) and Water Resistive Barrier Coatings; 2006.
I.
ASTM G153 - Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for
Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2004 (Reapproved 2010).
J.
ASTM G155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of
Nonmetallic Materials; 2005a.
K.
EIMA 101.01 - Standard Test Method for Freeze/Thaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and
Finish Systems (EIFS), Class PB; 1995, Revised August 1995 (modified ASTM C 67).
L.
ICC-ES AC219 - Acceptance Criteria for Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems; 2009.
M. NFPA 259 - Standard Test Method for Potential Heat Building Materials; 2009.
N.
NFPA 268 - Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using
a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2012.
O.
NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of
Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2012.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on system materials.
C.
Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard range of samples illustrating available
coating colors and textures.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Maintain copy of specified installation standard and manufacturer's installation instructions at
project site at all times during installation.
B.
EIFS Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all EIFS products other than insulation from the
same manufacturer with qualifications as follows:
1. Member in good standing of EIMA (EIFS Industry Members Association).
2. Manufacturer of EIFS products for not less than 5 years.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
072400 - 1
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Insulation Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved by manufacturer of EIFS and approved and
labeled under third party quality program as required by applicable building code.
D.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in EIFS work and approved by the EIFS
manufacturer.
1.05 MOCK-UP
A.
Construct mock-up of typical EIFS application on specified substrate, size as indicated on
drawings, and including flashings, joints, and edge conditions.
B.
Locate mock-up as indicated on drawings.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Delivery: Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with
labels intact. Inspect materials and notify manufacturer of any discrepancies.
B.
Storage: Store materials as directed by manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Protect Portland cement based materials from moisture and humidity. Store under cover
off the ground in a dry location.
2. Protect insulation materials from exposure to sunlight.
1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not prepare materials or apply EIFS during inclement weather unless areas of installation
are protected. Protect installed EIFS areas from inclement weather until dry.
B.
Do not install coatings or sealants when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F.
C.
Do not leave installed insulation board exposed to sunlight for extended periods of time.
1.08 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Provide manufacturer's standard material warranty, covering a period of not less than 5 years.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
United States Gypsum Company; System DuroScreen 1000.
B.
Other Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Sto Corp; Product ____: www.stocorp.com.
C.
Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM
A.
Exterior Insulation and Finish System: BARRIER type; reinforced finish coating on insulation
board mechanically-fastened to substrate; provide a complete system that has been tested to
show compliance with the following characteristics; include all components of specified system
and substrate in tested samples.
B.
Fire Characteristics:
1. Flammability: Pass, when tested in accordance with NFPA 285.
2. Ignitibility: No sustained flaming when tested in accordance with NFPA 268.
3. Potential Heat of Foam Plastic Insulation Tested Independently of Assembly: No portion of
the assembly having potential heat that exceeds that of the insulation sample tested for
flammability (above), when tested in accordance with NFPA 259 with results expressed in
Btu per square foot.
C.
Water Penetration Resistance: No water penetration beyond the plane of the base
coat/insulation board interface after 15 minutes, when tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at
6.24 psf differential pressure with tracer dye in the water spray; include in tested sample at least
two vertical joints and one horizontal joint of same type to be used in construction; disassemble
sample if necessary to determine extent of water penetration.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072400 - 2
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
D.
Salt Spray Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling,
delamination, or corrosion of finish coating after 300 hours exposure in accordance with ASTM
B117, using at least three samples matching intended assembly, at least 4 by 6 inches in size.
E.
Freeze-Thaw Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling,
delamination, or corrosion of finish coating when viewed under 5x magnification after 10 cycles,
when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC 219 or 235.
F.
Freeze-Thaw Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling,
delamination, or corrosion of finish coating when viewed under 5x magnification after 60 cycles,
when tested in accordance with EIMA 101.01.
G.
Weathering Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling,
delamination, or corrosion of finish coating when viewed under 5x magnification after 2000
hours of accelerated weathering conducted in accordance with ASTM G153 Cycle 1 or ASTM
G155 Cycle 1, 5, or 9.
H.
Water Degradation Resistance: No cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, blistering, peeling,
delamination, or corrosion of finish coating after 14 days exposure, when tested in accordance
with ASTM D2247.
I.
Mildew Resistance: No growth supported on finish coating during 28 day exposure period,
when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.
J.
Abrasion Resistance Of Finish: No cracking, checking or loss of film integrity when tested in
accordance with ASTM D968 with 500 liters of sand.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Finish Coating Top Coat: Water-based, air curing, acrylic or polymer-based finish with integral
color and texture.
1. Color: As selected from manufacturer's range of standard colors.
B.
Base Coat: Fiber-reinforced, acrylic or polymer-based product compatible with insulation board
and reinforcing mesh.
C.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, open weave glass fiber fabric, treated for compatibility and
improved bond with coating, weight, strength, and number of layers as required to meet
required system impact rating.
D.
Insulation Board: Molded, expanded polystyrene board; ASTM C578, Type I; with the following
characteristics:
1. Board Size: 24 by 48 inches.
2. Board Size Tolerance: plus/minus 1/16 inch from square and dimension.
3. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings.
a. Min of 1 1/2" thick unless noted otherwise.
b. Min of 1 1/2" thick where any 3/4" score joints are indicated.
c. Score joints to be v-groove 3/4" deep x 3/4" wide.
4. Thickness Tolerance: plus/minus 1/16 inch maximum.
5. Board Edges: Square.
6. Thermal Resistance (R factor per 1 in (25.4 mm)) at 75 degrees F: 3.60.
7. Board Density: 0.9 lb/cu ft.
8. Compressive Resistance: 10 psi.
9. Compressive Resistance: 10 psi.
10. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
11. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
12. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/450, when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Insulation Adhesive: Type required by EIFS manufacturer for project substrate.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072400 - 3
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Trim: EIFS manufacturer's standard PVC or galvanized steel trim accessories, as required for a
complete project and including starter track.
C.
Sealant Materials: Type ____ as specified in Section 079005.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A.
Install in accordance with EIFS manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1397.
B.
Where different requirements appear in either document, comply with the most stringent.
C.
Neither of these documents supercedes the provisions of the Contract Documents that define
the contractual relationships between the parties or the scope of work.
3.02 INSTALLATION - INSULATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install back wrap reinforcing mesh at all openings and terminations that are not to be protected
with trim.
C.
On wall surfaces, install boards vertically. On horizontal surfaces, install boards _______.
D.
Place boards in a method to maximize tight joints. Stagger vertical joints and interlock at
corners. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. Achieve a continuous
flush insulation surface, with no gaps in excess of 1/16 inch.
E.
Rasp irregularities off surface of installed insulation board.
F.
Adhesive Attachment: Use method recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
3.03 INSTALLATION - FINISH
A.
Base Coat: Apply in thickness as necessary to fully embed reinforcing mesh, wrinkle free,
including back-wrap at all terminations of the EIFS. Install reinforcing fabric as recommended by
EIFS manufacturer.
B.
Apply finish coat after base coat has dried not less than 24 hours and finish to a uniform texture
and color.
C.
Finish Coat Thickness: 1/16 inch.
D.
Apply sealant at finish perimeter and expansion joints in accordance with Section 079005.
3.04 INSTALLATION - FINISH
A.
Joints: Install control and expansion joints at spacings indicated on the drawings. Do not exceed
150 sq ft for areas defined by the placement of control joints.
B.
Reinforcing Mesh: Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using mechanical
fasteners at spacing recommended.
1. Lap reinforcing mesh edges and ends 2 inches minimum.
C.
Base Coat: Install to minimum thickness specified, following manufacturer's instructions. Leave
base coat in condition suitable to receive finish coat.
D.
Finish Coat: Apply finish coat after base coat has dried not less than 24 hours, embed finish
aggregate, and finish to a uniform texture and color.
E.
Apply sealant at finish perimeter and at control and expansion joints as detailed and in
accordance with Section 079005.
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Do not permit finish surface to become soiled or damaged.
B.
Remove excess and waste EIFS materials from project site.
C.
Clean EIFS surfaces and work areas of foreign materials resulting from EIFS operations.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
072400 - 4
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 074113
METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Architectural roofing system of preformed steel panels.
B.
Fastening system.
C.
Factory finishing.
D.
Accessories and miscellaneous components.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 079005 - Joint Sealers: Field-installed sealants.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A463/A463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated, by the Hot-Dip
Process; 2010.
B.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
C.
ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include layouts of roof panels, details of edge and penetration conditions,
spacing and type of connections, flashings, underlayments, and special conditions.
1. Show work to be field-fabricated or field-assembled.
C.
Warranty: Submit specified manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been
completed in FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's name and are registered with
manufacturer.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of roofing systems
similar to those required for this project, with not less than 5 years of documented experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store roofing panels on project site as recommended by manufacturer to minimize damage to
panels prior to installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Finish Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s special warranty covering failure of factory-applied
exterior finish on metal roof panels and agreeing to repair or replace panels that show evidence
of finish degradation, including significant fading, chalking, cracking, or peeling within specified
warranty period of 5 year period from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Waterproofing Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s warranty for weathertightness of roofing
system, including agreement to repair or replace roofing that fails to keep out water within
specified warranty period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Berridge Products
a. 24 ga. Zee-Lock panels 2" x 16" seams
B.
Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
074113 - 1
METAL ROOF PANELS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.02 ARCHITECTURAL METAL ROOF PANELS
A.
Architectural Metal Roofing: Provide complete engineered system complying with specified
requirements and capable of remaining weathertight while withstanding anticipated movement
of substrate and thermally induced movement of roofing system.
B.
Metal Panels: Factory-formed panels with factory-applied finish.
1. Steel Panels:
a. Zinc-coated steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M; minimum G60 galvanizing.
b. Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel conforming to ASTM A792/A792M; minimum AZ50
coating.
c. Aluminum-coated steel conforming to ASTM A463/A463M; minimum Type 2 T2-65
coating.
d. Steel Thickness: Minimum 0.023 inch.
2. Profile: Standing seam, with minimum ___ inch seam height; concealed fastener system
for field seaming with special tool.
3. Texture: Smooth.
4. Length: Full length of roof slope, without lapped horizontal joints.
5. Width: Maximum panel coverage of 12 inches.
2.03 ATTACHMENT SYSTEM
A.
Concealed System: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel or nylon-coated aluminum
concealed anchor clips designed for specific roofing system and engineered to meet
performance requirements, including anticipated thermal movement.
2.04 PANEL FINISH
A.
Fluoropolymer Coating System: Manufacturer’s standard multi-coat thermocured coating
system, including minimum 70 percent fluoropolymer color topcoat with minimum total dry film
thickness of 0.9 mil; color and gloss to match sample.
2.05 ACCESSORIES AND MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A.
Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Items: Provide flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings,
closure strips, preformed crickets, caps, and equipment curbs of the same material, thickness,
and finish as used for the roofing panels. Items completely concealed after installation may
optionally be made of stainless steel.
B.
Rib and Ridge Closures: Provide prefabricated, close-fitting components of steel with corrosion
resistant finish, closed-cell synthetic rubber, neoprene, or PVC, or combination steel and
closed-cell foam.
C.
Sealants: As specified in Section 079005.
1. Exposed sealant must cure to rubber-like consistency.
2. Concealed sealant must be non-hardening type.
D.
Framing:
1. 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" & 1 1/2" x 3" annodized aluminum framing.
2. Designed to withstand 3 second gust of 90 mph.
3. Anchor to building design by Fabricator.
4. All frame joints welded, ground smooth and galvanized paint to match framing surface.
2.06 FABRICATION
A.
Panels: Fabricate panels and accessory items at factory, using manufacturer’s standard
processes as required to achieve specified appearance and performance requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Coordinate roofing work with provisions for roof drainage, flashing, trim, penetrations, and other
adjoining work to assure that the completed roof will be free of leaks.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
074113 - 2
METAL ROOF PANELS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Remove protective film from surface of roof panels immediately prior to installation. Strip film
carefully, to avoid damage to prefinished surfaces.
C.
Separate dissimilar metals by applying a bituminous coating, self-adhering rubberized asphalt
sheet, or other permanent method approved by roof panel manufacturer.
D.
Where metal will be in contact with wood or other absorbent material subject to wetting, seal
joints with sealing compound and apply one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Overall: Install roofing system in accordance with approved shop drawings and panel
manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, as applicable to specific project conditions.
Anchor all components of roofing system securely in place while allowing for thermal and
structural movement.
1. Install roofing system with concealed clips and fasteners, except as otherwise
recommended by manufacturer for specific circumstances.
2. Minimize field cutting of panels. Where field cutting is absolutely required, use methods
that will not distort panel profiles. Use of torches for field cutting is absolutely prohibited.
B.
Accessories: Install all components required for a complete roofing assembly, including
flashings, gutters, downspouts, trim, moldings, closure strips, preformed crickets, caps,
equipment curbs, rib closures, ridge closures, and similar roof accessory items.
C.
Roof Panels: Install panels in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, minimizing
transverse joints except at junction with penetrations.
1. Form weathertight standing seams incorporating concealed clips, using an automatic
mechanical seaming device approved by the panel manufacturer.
2. Incorporate concealed clips at panel joints, and apply snap-on battens to provide
weathertight joints.
3. Provide sealant tape or other approved joint sealer at lapped panel joints.
3.03 CLEANING
A.
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,
excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and
unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.
3.04 PROTECTION
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed sheet metal work at completion of installation. Remove grease and oil films,
excess joint sealer, handling marks, and debris from installation, leaving the work clean and
unmarked, free from dents, creases, waves, scratch marks, or other damage to the finish.
B.
Do not permit storage of materials or roof traffic on installed roof panels. Provide temporary
walkways or planks as necessary to avoid damage to completed work. Protect roofing until
completion of project.
C.
Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged roof panels or accessories before date of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
074113 - 3
METAL ROOF PANELS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 074213
METAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured metal panels for walls and soffits, with insulation, liners, related flashings, and
accessory components.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
B.
ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or
deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter
components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release of
loads; and deflection of structural support framing.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout, joints, construction details, methods of anchorage.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples of wall panel and soffit panel, __10__ inch by ____ inch in size
illustrating finish color, sheen, and texture.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of experience.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap.
B.
Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or
abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage.
C.
Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective work within a twenty year period after Substantial Completion for degradation
of panel finish, including color fading caused by exposure to weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Berridge Manufacturing Co
a. 24 ga. HR-16 panel
2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MANUFACTURED METAL PANELS
A.
Wall Panel System: Factory fabricated prefinished metal panel system, site assembled.
1. Provide exterior panels, interior liner panels, soffit panels, and subgirt framing assembly.
2. Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by positive and
negative wind pressure acting normal to plane of wall.
3. Maximum Allowable Deflection of Panel: 1/90 of span.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
074213 - 1
METAL WALL PANELS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
4.
Movement: Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or
deterioration of seals, movement within system; movement between system and perimeter
components when subject to seasonal temperature cycling; dynamic loading and release
of loads; and deflection of structural support framing.
5. Drainage: Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation
occurring within panel system.
6. Fabrication: Formed true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or
defects; pieces of longest practical lengths.
7. Corners: Factory-fabricated in one continuous piece with minimum 18 inch returns.
8. Exterior Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF) coating, top
coat over epoxy primer.
9. Exterior Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF) coating, top
coat over epoxy primer.
10. Exterior Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash coat.
11. Interior Panel Finish: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester coating, top coat over
recommended primer.
B.
Exterior Panels:
1. Profile: Vertical; style as indicated.
2. Side Seams: Double-interlocked, tight-fitting, sealed with continuous gaskets.
3. Panel Width: ____ inches.
C.
Liner Panels:
1. Profile: Vertical; style as indicated.
2. Side Seams: Interlocking, sealed with continuous bead of sealant.
3. Panel Width: ____ inches.
D.
Soffit Panels:
1. Profile: Style as indicated.
E.
Wall Panel System: Preformed and prefinished metal panel system of horizontal ________
profile; site assembled; with subgirt framing assembly.
F.
Exterior Panel:
1. Minimum 24 gage thick precoated steel sheet.
2. Profile as indicated. 16 inch by 8 foot long panels.
3. Interlocking edges, fitted with continuous gaskets.
4. Color: As indicated on drawings.
G.
Subgirts:
H.
Internal and External Corners: Same material, thickness, and finish as exterior sheets;
________ profile to suit system; shop cut and factory mitered to required angles. Mitered
internal corners to be back braced with ____ gage precoated sheet stock to maintain continuity
of profile.
I.
Expansion Joints: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; ____ gage;
manufacturer's standard brake formed type, of profile to suit system.
J.
Trim: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles.
K.
Anchors: Galvanized steel.
2.03 MATERIALS
A.
Precoated Steel Sheet: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M Structural Steel
(SS) or Forming Steel (FS), with G90/Z275 coating; continuous coil-coated on exposed surfaces
with specified finish coating and on panel back with specified panel back coating.
B.
Precoated Steel Sheet: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet, ASTM A792/A792M,
Commercial Steel (CS)) or Forming Steel (FS), with AZ50/AZM150 coating;
continuous-coil-coated on exposed surfaces with specified finish coating and on panel back with
specified panel back coating.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
074213 - 2
METAL WALL PANELS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Exterior Finish Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyvinylidene fluoride (PVF) top coat,
over epoxy primer.
D.
Panel Back Coating: Panel manufacturer's standard polyester wash coat.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type suitable for use with system, permanently resilient;
ultraviolet and ozone resistant.
B.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type to suit application; steel, hot dip galvanized.
C.
Field Touch-up Paint: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
2.05 FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B.
Form pieces in longest practicable lengths.
C.
Form panels for standing seams.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Protect surfaces in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals with bituminous
paint. Allow to dry prior to installation.
B.
Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level, and plumb.
C.
Locate joints over supports. Lap panel ends minimum 2 inches.
D.
Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect.
E.
Seal and place gaskets to prevent weather penetration. Maintain neat appearance.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
074213 - 3
METAL WALL PANELS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 075350
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
PART I GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Roof insulation and cover board.
B.
Modified bitumen roof system with manufacturer’s unlimited 20 year warranty.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 07600--Sheet metal
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASTM D41--Asphalt primer used in roofing, damp proofing, and waterproofing.
B.
ASTM D312--Asphalt used in roofing.
C.
ASTM D2178--Asphalt impregnated glass mat used in roofing and waterproofing.
D.
FS SS-C-153--Cement, bituminous, plastic.
E.
Manufacturer's reference manual, most current edition.
F.
NRCA roofing and waterproofing manual.
1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
Metal deck, one layer of insulation with cover board
1. 3 ½” polyisocyanurate rigid roof insulation, minimum R-21
2. ½” cover board
B.
Modified bitumen system
C.
Surfaced two ply modified bitumen roof system
D.
Wind Uplift Resistance
E.
System shall be designed to resist uplift pressures calculated using ASCE 7-05 as follows:
1. Refer to Structural drawings for indicated:
a. Field uplift pressure:
PSF
b. Perimeter uplift pressure:
PSF
c. Corner uplift pressure:
PSF
d. Width of perimeter wind zone:
Feet
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturer’s certification that the roofing system complies with the standards set forth
in the specifications including wind uplift rating, and that the roofer is certified by the
manufacturer to install the specified warranted roof system.
B.
Submit product data on any material substitutions.
C.
Submit the manufacturer's cut sheet on the system chosen.
D.
Submit a color sample of the membrane for approval.
E.
Submit the manufacturer's installation instructions for the base flashing systems.
F.
Submit shop drawings produced by the roof system manufacturer showing the dimensions and
locations of the roof field, perimeter and corners and insulation shop drawings showing plan
views of insulation board with the location and number of fasteners required for the roof field,
perimeter and corners (fastener patterns).
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
The installer of the roof system must have a minimum of five years experience installing this
type of roofing on projects of this type and size.
B.
The installer must be approved by the manufacturer of the roofing materials.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
075350 - 1
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
It is the intent to install all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's latest printed
specifications. If there is a conflict between manufacturer's instructions and these specifications,
notify the owner and the consultant. If there is a question of quantity in materials or application
method, the more rigid specification shall apply.
D.
A pre-installation conference shall be convened prior to the beginning of this work. The
conference should be used to clear up any questions or ambiguities about materials and
methods of installation.
E.
Provide roof covering materials bearing U.L. Labels. The roof assembly shall have a Class A
fire rating.
F.
The roofing and sheet metal must be installed and warranted by the roofing contractor. If the
sheet metal work is installed by a sub-contractor, that contractor must be employed by the
roofing contractor.
1.07 DELIVERING, STORAGE, AND HANDLING OF MATERIALS
A.
Deliver materials to the site bearing manufacturers' labels, production dates, or product codes.
B.
Deliver material on pallets. Roll goods shall be stacked on end. Handle all goods to prevent
damage.
C.
Store bulk bitumens in heated tankers. Observe the manufacturer's requirements for storage
and usage to avoid modification of the physical properties of the bitumen. Do not install roofing
materials until bitumens have been heated to their EVT ranges.
D.
Store materials in dry protected areas. Use enclosed trailers when possible. Do not store roll
goods or insulation materials in the PVC shipping wrappers. Use a waterproof tarpaulin to
completely cover the materials. Protect materials from freezing.
E.
Keep lids on plastic cement, adhesive, primers, and other materials which are sensitive to
evaporation.
F.
Do not thin primers, adhesives, or similar materials unless specified by the manufacturer.
G.
Remove any material from the job site which becomes wet or damaged.
H.
Comply with local fire codes and ordinances when flammable materials are to be stored.
I.
Do not load the roof deck or structure beyond its capacity.
1.08 PROJECT SITE AND CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install roofing products when moisture in any form is present (eg. rain, dew, frost, ice, or
snow).
B.
Care must be taken when the mean temperature falls below 40 degrees F. Follow the
manufacturer's instructions for cold weather application.
C.
Test surfaces for moisture by pouring or mopping hot bitumen over a section of the area in
question. Do not proceed with roofing operations if:
1. There is any foaming or bubbling of the bitumen.
2. If the bitumen can be readily stripped from the substrate after it cools.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
Before final payment, submit to the owner a warranty for a period of 2 years. The warranty shall
cover all roofing, sheet metal, and related work called out in these documents. It shall cover
defects in material and workmanship, as well as agreeing to make prompt repairs if notified of a
leak. Provide a warranty inspection 3 months prior to the expiration. Repair defects in materials
or labor discovered at this time. These defects shall include, but not be limited to, bitumen
drippage, voids, blisters, vapor ridges, or fish mouths.
B.
Provide a maintenance schedule and maintenance information for the roof system installed.
C.
Provide a manufacturer's warranty on the system installed for a period of twenty years. The
warranty shall cover material, and labor. It may not be limited by a penal sum.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
075350 - 2
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A.
To the greatest degree possible supply products from one manufacturer. Acceptable
manufacturers:
1. Firestone
2. GAF
2.02 ROOFING MEMBRANE
A.
Polyester or glass-fiber mats saturated, impregnated or filled and coated on both sides with
polymer-modified asphalt; styrene butadiene styrene (SBS). Weight of plies as required by the
manufacturer for the specified manufacturer’s warranty period.
B.
Base ply, smooth, SBS
1. Finish ply, surfaced, FR, SBS. The surfacing shall have a minimum total solar reflectance
of 0.70 when tested in accordance with one of the following Solar Reflectance Test
Methods: ASTM C1549, ASTM E903, ASTM E1175 or ASTM E1918; and a minimum
thermal emittance of 0.75 when tested in accordance with one of the following Thermal
Emittance Test Methods: ASTM C835, ASTM C1371 or ASTM E408. The roofing shall
also have a solar reflectance index (SRI) equal to or greater than 78 calculated according
to ASTM E 1980 as required to qualify for one point under SS Credit 7.2, Heat Island
Reduction: Roof, as described in “LEED for Existing Buildings: Operations &
Maintenance”.
2. Ultra-white, or otherwise complying with City of Houston cool roof requirements when
project is located in the City of Houston.
2.03 ROOFING INSULATION
A.
Cover board:
B.
Gypsum fiber roof board
C.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2.04 WIDTH: 4 FEET.
2.05 LENGTH:4 FEET.
2.06 FLEXURAL STRENGTH, PARALLEL (ASTM C473): 110 LBF, MINIMUM.
2.07 PERMEANCE (ASTM E96): NOT MORE THAN 26 PERMS.
2.08 WATER ABSORPTION (ASTM C1177): LESS THAN 10 PERCENT OF WEIGHT.
2.09 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (NOMINAL): 500 POUNDS PER SQUARE INCH.
2.10 SURFACE WATER ABSORPTION (ASTM C473): NOT MORE THAN 1.6 GRAMS.
2.11 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS: USG SECUROCK GYPSUM FIBER ROOF BOARD
A.
Rigid roof insulation:
1. Rigid Polyisocyanurate
2. Thickness: 2 ½”, minimum R-15
3. Compressive strength: 23 pounds per square inch (158 kPa) minimum
B.
Dimensional stability: 2 percent maximum linear change when conditioned at 158 F (70 C) and
97 percent relative humidity for seven days
1. Size: Use 4' x 4' boards only
2. Acceptable Products: AC Foam II, Atlas Roofing Corporation.
2.12 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A.
Asphalt bitumens: ASTM D312, Type IV for insulation adhesive, and installation of the modified
bitumen membrane.
B.
Asphalt primer: ASTM D-41-73, type PA-1125.
C.
Plastic cement: type PA-1021.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
075350 - 3
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.13 BASE FLASHING
A.
Surfaced to match finish ply, FR.
2.14 FABRICS
A.
Asphalt saturated woven glass membrane, Glasfab by Koppers.
2.15 CANTS, TAPERED STRIPS, AND TAPERED CRICKETS
A.
Cants and tapered edge manufactured from asphalt impregnated wood fiberboard or perlite
materials. Provide as required to produce positive drainage.
B.
Tapered crickets
1. 1/2"/ft.
2. 1:1 ratio
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to receive the new roof assembly, base flashing, and sheet metal. Report any
conditions which may lead to defective installation or failure in workmanship or products. The
products used should be suitable for the conditions present to produce a functional, leak free
installation.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean and prepare the deck to receive the new roof system. Comply with manufacturer’s
instructions for preparation of the substrate to receive the roof insulation and roofing materials.
B.
Provide tests for fastener pull out rates when required by the roof system manufacturer.
C.
Beginning installation means acceptance of the substrate.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install the rigid roof insulation over the metal deck using the mechanical fasteners, and discs.
The insulation is to be installed to resist the specified wind uplift resistance. Attach the insulation
using the number of fasteners required for each board in the field. Increase this number as
required at the corners and perimeters. Fill all voids over 1/4" with additional insulation. Stagger
joints between cover board and insulation a minimum of 6" and install the cover board in solid
moppings of hot asphalt. Install enough asphalt to firmly adhere each board, minimum
30#'s/100 sq. ft. Walk in each board to assure full adhesion. Do not force joints together. Install
tapered edge strips and crickets as required for positive drainage.
B.
Over the cover board, install the modified base roofing with 3" side laps, and end laps. Use a
minimum of 25#'s of type IV asphalt. Offset the lap seams between courses. Install the granular
surfaced modified sheet in solid moppings of type IV asphalt.
1. Exert sufficient pressure on the roll to prevent voids.
2. Install loose granules over asphalt over runs.
3. Install the roof membrane from the low edge of the roof in shingle fashion.
4. At no place shall felt touch felt. Cut out and repair wrinkles, voids and fish mouths.
5. Follow the manufacturer's latest printed specifications for installation of the roofing
material.
C.
Install base flashings at walls, curb flashings, and base flashing conditions. Prime metal and
cementitious surfaces before installation. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation.
1. Install one layer of reinforcing membrane, and granular surfaced base flashing. Lap in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements.
2. Secure base flashing at the top a minimum of 8" O.C. Provide compression bars at
concrete surfaces.
3. Laps in the reinforcing layer shall not coincide with the laps in the base flashings.
4. All flashing sheets shall be cut off the end on the roll, and installed vertically. Install to a
selvage edge only.
D.
Take all required precautions when using torch applied products.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
075350 - 4
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
1.
2.
3.
4.
For Construction
09-24-13
Workers must be trained in proper application methods, and safety.
Fully charged fire extinguishers are to be kept at the site at all times.
One worker must remain at the site a minimum of one hour beyond the time any open
flame is used.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety requirements, and FM Bulletin 1-29.
E.
Flashing at metal flanges: Install the base ply of the system under the flange. Prime the flange,
install it in a solid bed of flashing cement. Secure the flange with roofing nails installed 3" O.C. in
a staggered pattern. Flash the flange with an additional layer of modified base roofing in hot
bitumen. Install the granular surfaced sheet. Install neoprene based sealants at leading edge of
flashing where required.
F.
Install roof protection course at the roof access areas and ladders. Install one roll of protection
course at the roof mounted equipment.
1. Invert the material after cutting.
2. Install in hot asphalt in maximum 6' lengths.
3. Allow space for drainage between units.
G.
Coordinate all work in this section with sheet metal and related trades.
3.04 QUALITY CONTROL
A.
The owner may employ inspection services during the course of this project. Provide safe and
adequate access to all parts of the work.
B.
Test cuts may be taken to determine quantities and quality. Provide labor and material to repair
these cuts. Test cuts will not exceed one per 10,000 sq. ft. of area. Testing will be paid for by
the owner. If problems are indicated, further cuts and tests may be done, pay for any additional
testing costs due to defective work.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect the roof membrane from damage until acceptance by the owner. Repair or replace
damaged sections.
B.
Place temporary plywood panels or other protection over heavily trafficked areas.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
075350 - 5
MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Shop fabricated sheet metal complete with required connecting pieces, end closures, and
anchorages. All sheet metal related to the reroof is to be replaced. Perimeter sheet metal shall
be designed and installed in compliance with FM Global Data Sheet 1-49
1. counter flashings
2. compression bars
3. roof flashings
4. vents
5. copings
6. lead vent flashings
7. scuppers
8. other metal work as shown in the drawings
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 04816 - Masonry Veneer: Through-wall flashings in masonry.
B.
Section 061000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers.
C.
Section 07510 - Built-Up Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Roofing system.
D.
Section 079005 - Joint Sealers.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods,
flashings, terminations, and installation details.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating metal finish color.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
B.
Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with five
years of experience.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope
metal sheets to ensure drainage.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
Sheet metal work shall be included in the 2 year roofing warranty
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WARRANTY
2.02 GALVANIZED STEEL: ASTM A653/A653M, WITH G90/Z275 ZINC COATING; MINIMUM 0.02
INCH THICK BASE METAL.
2.03 SHEET MATERIALS
A.
Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum
0.02 inch thick base metal, shop pre-coated with fluoropolymer coating.
1. Prefinished metal where exposed to view from building exterior: 24 ga. galvanized steel,
Kynar 500 coating, Petersen Aluminum, or equal.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
076200 - 1
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M); 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre
coated with fluoropolymer coating of color as selected.
1. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat,
thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.
C.
Lead: ASTM B749, 2.5 lb/sq ft thick.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B.
Use stainless steel screws with neoprene washers where fasteners are exposed.
C.
Use expansion fasteners in concrete. Plastic fasteners are unacceptable in exposed locations.
D.
Underlayment:
1. 20 mil vinyl underlayment by B.F. Goodrich. BFG 103 construction adhesive for laps.
2. Ice & Watershield, W. R. Grace.
3. Permabarrier, W.R. Grace
E.
Slip Sheet: Rosin sized building paper.
F.
Primer: Zinc chromate type.
G.
Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
H.
Plumbing vent flashings from 2 1/2# lead. Drain flashings from 4# sheet lead.
I.
Sealant: Type ES3 specified in Section 079005.
1. One part urethane by Pycora
J.
Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I.
K.
Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50) type.
2.05 FABRICATION
A.
Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
B.
Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet, continuous.
C.
Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
D.
Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners.
E.
Remove all filings and shavings from surfaces
F.
Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
G.
Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with
sealant.
H.
Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form
drip.
I.
Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.
J.
Install sheet metal in a maximum of 10' lengths allowing for expansion and contraction between
each unit.
K.
Separate dissimilar metals. Use bituminous paint or underlayments as necessary to accomplish
this.
L.
All copings, caps, etc. shall be backed up with underlayment. The construction should be
watertight without the sheet metal. The primary purpose of the metal is decorative, and to
protect the roof and construction materials.
M.
2.06 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION
A.
Gutters: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Rectangular profile.
B.
Downspouts: Rectangular profile.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
076200 - 2
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Gutters and Downspouts: Size indicated.
D.
Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
E.
Downspout Boots: Steel.
F.
Seal metal joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets
in place, and nailing strips located.
B.
Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
B.
Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film
thickness of 15 mil.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Vents and roof flashings:
1. Lock seam and solder, or rivet and solder all metal roof flashings.
2. Set in a solid 1/8" bed of flashing cement over the finished roof, and nail a minimum of 3"
O.C. in a staggered pattern.
a. Secure with self-tapping screws where nailers are not provided.
b. Flanges are to lay flat and be a minimum of 4" wide. They shall not be wider than the
wood supports they are secured to.
3. Replace all vents, duct bases, roof flanges, plumbing flashings, etc. incorporated into the
new roof. Minimum gauge for galvanized flashings is 24, stainless steel 26, copper 16 oz.
4. All heating flues shall be double wall constructions with briedert caps. Replace any existing
constructions that do not comply, or that have rusted or deteriorated.
B.
Copings
1. Provide all copings as pre-engineered assembly including
a. 16 ga. galv. cleat
b. Concealed cover plates with interanl preformed channel for water drainage.
c. Stainless steel screws
d. Hickman Permasnap plus, or approved equal.
1) 1800 892 9173
2) www.wph.com
2. Secure with a continuous cleat at the face, and a screw with a neoprene washer 20" O.C.
at the rear. Screws must engage the wood blocking a minimum of 1”.
3. Reference: SMACNA pages 2.9, 2.10, 3.1-3.10
C.
Counter flashings
1. Install at all base flashing where the top is exposed, include roof hatches. Fabricate with a
minimum 4" face. Reference: SMACNA pages 4.5 -4.8.
2. Surface mount: fabricate from minimum 22 ga. G.S. or 24 ga. SS. Reference: SMACNA
pages 4.9 -4.10.
3. Lap minimum 4" between sections.
4. Pipe penetration flashings
5. Open pitch pockets are unacceptable.
6. Single pipe, use a pitch pocket with an umbrella cover. Fill the pitch pocket or seal the pipe
with fabric and cement as a back up. Reference: Figure 4-16 A, Figure 4-16 B.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
076200 - 3
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
For Construction
09-24-13
Multiple pipes, Reference: Figure 4-14A. Fill the pitch pocket or seal the pipes with fabric
and cement as a back up.
4.Equipment support or structural member, Reference: Figure 4-15
Provide all skilled labor and materials to disconnect, and reroute lines as required to
comply with the detail.
Scuppers and Conductor Head, Figure 1-26.
Overflow Scuppers, Figure 1-30.
Downspouts and Downspout Connection, Figures 1-32 and 1-33.
Coordinate all work in this section with roofing and related trades.
D.
E.
Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
F.
Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
G.
Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines
accurate to profiles.
H.
Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with
neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
I.
Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
J.
Slope gutters 1/4 inch per foot minimum.
K.
Connect downspouts to downspout boots. Grout connection watertight.
L.
Set splash pans under downspouts. Set in place with roofing cement.
3.04 3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Exercise care when working on or about roof surfaces to avoid damaging or puncturing
membrane or flashings.
B.
Clean the roof surface of metal cut offs, screws, nails, etc. on a daily basis.
C.
Place temporary plywood panels or other protection over heavily trafficked areas.
3.05 SCHEDULE
A.
Gutters and Downspouts: Prefinished galvanized steel, 0.0217 inch thick.
B.
Scuppers: Prefinished glavanized steel, 0.0217 inch thick.
C.
Counterflashings at Curb-Mounted Roof Items, including skylights and roof hatches:
D.
Roofing Penetration Flashings, for Pipes, Structural Steel, and Equipment Supports:
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
076200 - 4
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 077123
MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pre-finished galvanized steel gutters and downspouts.
B.
Precast concrete splash pads.
C.
Sheet metal splash pans.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
B.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors' National Association; 2003.
1.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for sizing components for rainfall
intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years.
B.
Conform to applicable code for size and method of rain water discharge.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, configurations, jointing methods, fastening methods,
locations, and installation details.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope to
drain.
B.
Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration, staining, or damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Gutters and Downspouts:
1. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 MATERIALS
A.
Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating;
minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal.
1. Finish: Shop pre-coated with modified silicone coating.
2. Color: As scheduled.
2.03 COMPONENTS
A.
Gutters: CDA rectangular style profile.
B.
Downspouts: CDA Rectangular profile.
C.
Anchors and Supports: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
1. Anchoring Devices: In accordance with CDA requirements.
2. Gutter Supports: Brackets.
3. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
D.
Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
077123 - 1
MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.04 ACCESSORIES
2.05 FABRICATION
A.
Form gutters and downspouts of profiles and size indicated.
B.
Fabricate with required connection pieces.
C.
Form sections square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths, free of
distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints.
D.
Hem exposed edges of metal.
E.
Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories; seal watertight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Paint concealed metal surfaces and surfaces in contact with dissimilar metals with protective
backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 15 mil.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install gutters, downspouts, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Slope gutters 1/8" inch per foot, ___ percent minimum.
C.
Connect downspouts to storm sewer system. Grout connection watertight.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
077123 - 2
MANUFACTURED GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 077200
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Manufactured curbs, equipment rails, and pedestals.
B.
Roof hatches.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2011.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used.
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
4. Maintenance requirements.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURED CURBS
A.
Manufactured Curbs, Equipment Rails, and Other Roof Mounting Assemblies:
Factory-assembled hollow sheet metal construction with fully mitered and welded corners,
integral counterflashing, internal reinforcing, and top side and edges formed to shed water.
1. Sheet Metal: Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653/A653M, SS
Grade 33 ; G60 coating designation; 18 gage, 0.048 inch thick.
2. Roofing Cants: Provide integral sheet metal roofing cants dimensioned to begin slope at
top of roofing insulation; 1:1 slope; minimum cant height 4 inches.
3. Manufacture curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on roof deck, not on
insulation; match slope and configuration of roof deck.
4. Provide the layouts and configurations shown on the drawings.
B.
Pipe, Duct, and Conduit Mounting Pedestals: Vertical posts, minimum 8 inches square unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Provide preservative treated wood nailers over entire top surface, for supports to be
provided by others.
2. Height Above Finished Roof Surface: 6 inches, minimum.
3. Height Above Roof Deck: 14 inches, minimum.
2.02 ROOF HATCHES
A.
Manufacturers - Roof Hatches:
1. Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com
2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
B.
Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release
hardware.
C.
Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by
manufacturer.
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers that
automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load.
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.
6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
077200 - 1
ROOF ACCESSORIES
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather
integrity.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
077200 - 2
ROOF ACCESSORIES
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 079005
JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sealants and joint backing.
B.
Precompressed foam sealers.
C.
Hollow gaskets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 088000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2010.
B.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
C.
ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam
(Closed-Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
D.
SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;
www.aqmd.gov.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics.
C.
Samples: Submit two samples, 1/4 x 2 inch in size illustrating sealant colors for selection.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Applicator Qualifications: Contractor and job foreman shall have a minimum of 5 years
experience installing sealants.
B.
Compatibility with substrate: Applicator shall be responsible for verifying that sealants used are
compatible with joint substrates.
C.
Joint tolerance: Joint width/depth ratios are critical to sealant performance. Compliance with the
manufacturers' limitation is required.
D.
Manufacturer: The manufacturer of the sealant used shall have been in the business of
manufacturing the specified types of such sealants for not less than 10 years.
E.
1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A.
Delivery shall be in the manufacturer's original unopened container, clearly identifying each
product specified, relating it to the product literature submitted.
B.
Storage shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation, with proper precautions
concerning shelf life, temperature, humidity and similar storage factors ensuring the fitness of
the material when installed.
C.
Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
installation.
1.07 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
D.
Sealant joints shall be guaranteed against adhesive and cohesive failure of the sealant, and
against water penetration through the sealed joint for 2 years.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
079005 - 1
JOINT SEALERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
2.02 SEALANTS
A.
Sealants and Primers - General: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound
(VOC) content than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168.
B.
Type E1 - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 25,
Uses M, G, and A; multi- component.
1. Sealant : Sonneborn NP 2, or approved equal.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
C.
Type ___ - General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C834, Type OP,
Grade NF single component, paintable.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.
a. Tremco Acrylic Latex 834 manufactured by Tremco, Inc.
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
b. Painted wood trim.
c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
D.
Type ___ - Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C920, Class 25,
Uses T, I, M and A; multi- component.
1. Color: Color as selected.
a. Dymeric manufactured by Tremco Inc.
b. Sonneborn SL 1, or approved equal
2. Applications: Use for:
a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.
E.
Type ___ - Butyl Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, G, O; single
component, solvent release, non-skinning, non-sagging.
1. Applications: Use for:
a. Under thresholds at doors in exterior walls.
F.
Type ___ - Nonsag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, M, A,
O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non bleeding, non-sagging type.
1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces.
a. Dymonic manufactured by Tremco Inc.
b. Sonneborn NP 1, or approved equal
2. Applications: Use for:
a. As specified in Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Falshing and Trim.
b. between dissimelar exterior surfaces.
2.03 ACCESSORIES
A.
Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
B.
Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer
compatible with joint forming materials.
C.
Joint Filler: ASTM D1056: D1565: round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod.
1. Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30 to
50 percent larger than joint width.
D.
Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit
application.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
079005 - 2
JOINT SEALERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
B.
Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Clean, prepare, and size joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Rout joints as
required. Remove any loose materials and other foreign matter which might impair adhesion of
sealant.
B.
Verify that joint shaping materials and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
C.
Examine joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
D.
Use joint filler to achieve required joint depths to allow sealants to perform properly.
E.
Use bond breaker where required to avoid three sided adhesion.
F.
Prime surfaces with recommended primer.
G.
Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of
surfaces and material installation instructions.
B.
Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
C.
Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck
dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific
dimensions are indicated.
D.
Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
E.
Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
F.
Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer
when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
G.
Tool joints concave.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect sealants until cured.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
079005 - 3
JOINT SEALERS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A.
Related Documents:
1. Drawings and general provisions of the Subcontract apply to this Section.
2. Review these documents for coordination with additional requirements and information that
apply to work under this Section.
B.
Section Includes:
1. Steel doors and frames.
2. Preparation for door hardware.
1.02 <INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH IF APPLICABLE.>
A.
Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section
1. Division 04 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry" for frame anchors.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
2. Division 01 Section "Special Procedures."
3. Division 04 Section "Concrete Unit Masonry" for grouting and filling of frames.
4. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors."
5. Division 08 Section "Hardware."
6. Division 08 Section "Glazing."
7. Coordinate with [security/card access system] [and] [fire alarm system].
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
General:
1. The following documents form part of the Specifications to the extent stated. Where
differences exist between codes and standards, the one affording the greatest protection
shall apply.
2. Unless otherwise noted, the referenced standard edition is the current one at the time of
commencement of the Work.
3. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Requirements" for the list of applicable regulatory
requirements.
B.
ASTM International:
1. ASTM A653
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
2. ASTM C1363
Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building
Materials and Envelope Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus.
3. ASTM E90
Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne
Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
C.
California Building Code (CBC) Standard 7-2: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
D.
CBC Standard 7-4: Fire Test of Window Assemblies.
E.
HMMA 850: Fire Rated Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
F.
HMMA 861: Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
G.
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM) Standard Hollow Metal
Manufacturers’ Association (HMMA) 840: Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of
Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
H.
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 80: Fire Doors and Windows.
I.
NFPA Standard 252: Fire Tests for Door Assemblies.
J.
NFPA 257-1990: Standard Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
081113 - 1
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
K.
Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 10B: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
L.
UL Standard 10C: Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Division 01 Section "General Requirements."
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature, specifications and installation instructions.
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate door and frame elevations, dimensions, fire rating, door type, core,
reinforcement, finish, hardware locations, cutout locations, frame profiles, details, metal gage,
anchorage details, and finish.
D.
Schedule: Schedule of doors and frames, using same reference numbers for details and
openings as those on Drawings. Indicate frame and door types.
1.05 <INCLUDE PARAGRAPH BELOW ONLY IF REQUIRED.>
A.
Samples:
1. Frame corner, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
2. Door, with glass and glazing stops, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm).
1.06 <INCLUDE PARAGARPH BELOW FOR SOUND-RATED DOORS.>
A.
Certifications: Certification of performance for sound rated doors.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with HMMA 840 and 861.
1.08 <INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH IF THE PROJECT INCLUDES FIRE RATED
DOORS, FRAMES OR GLAZED LIGHT FRAMES. DELETE PORTIONS AS APPROPRIATE.>
A.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Comply with California Building Code (CBC) Chapters 7 and 10.
2. Fire Labeled Doors and Frames: Comply with the following:
a. HMMA 850, NFPA 252, CBC Standard 7-2, and UL 10B and 10C.
b. Exit Enclosure Doors: Rate of rise across door thickness after 30 minutes: Maximum
450 degrees F.
c. Installed Door and Frame Assemblies: NFPA 80.
3. Fire Labeled Window Frames: Comply with NFPA 257 and CBC 7-4.
1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store and handle steel doors and frames in a manner to prevent damage and
deterioration.
B.
Storage: Comply with HMMA 840 and manufacturer’s recommendations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Typical: Ceco Door Products, Forderer Cornice Works, Fenestra Corporation, or Steelcraft
Ingersoll-Rand.
B.
Sound Rated Doors and Frames: Overly Manufacturing Company or IAC Industrial Acoustics
Company.
2.02 MATERIALS:
A.
Doors: HMMA 861 Type A, 1-3/4” thick, full flush continuously welded edge seams with no
visible seams on faces or vertical edges, steel stiffened core, insulated with inorganic,
noncombustible material.
1. Exterior Doors: ASTM A653 hot-dip galvanized sheet steel, 16 gage (0.0538 inches
minimum) unless otherwise noted.
2. Interior Doors: 18 gage sheet steel (0.0428 inches minimum) unless otherwise noted.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
081113 - 2
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.03 FABRICATION
A.
Conform to requirements of NAAMM, except as specified otherwise in this Section.
B.
Hardware Preparation: Reinforce and prepare doors and frames to receive hardware furnished
under Division 08 Section "Hardware".
1. Minimum Gages for Hardware Reinforcing Plates: Provide in accordance with HMMA 861,
except hinge and pivot reinforcements shall be 7 gage minimum.
2. Locations for Reinforcing Hardware: Comply with Division 08 Section "Hardware".
3. Consult with Glenn Skipper, ext. 6125, and Pat DuPont, ext. 7668, on the following
paragraph. Omit par. if not applicable.
4. Electrical Hardware and Devices: Prepare doors and frames to receive electrical hardware
specified in Division 08 Section "Hardware", [and security/card access and fire alarm
devices provided under Division 16].
C.
Frames:
1. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames. Weld on
inside surfaces. Grind welded joints to smooth uniform finish.
2. Knocked Down Frames: Accurately form and miter interlocking joints of knocked down
frames to maintain hairline alignment of parts when field assembled.
3. Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames wider than 4’-0” with two 12 gage minimum formed
steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames.
4. Door Silencers:
a. Prepare frames for silencers.
b. Provide 3 silencers on strike jamb of single door frames [and 3 silencers each strike
jamb of double door frames with removable mullions. Provide 2 silencers on head of
double door frames without removable mullions. Omit silencers at gaskets.
5. Jamb Anchors: Provide per HMMA. Weld floor jamb anchors in place.
D.
Fire Rated Labels: Place where visible when doors and frames are in open, installed position.
E.
Finish: Comply with requirements of Division 09 Section "Painting" - for primer, including
application and compatibility with specified finishes.
1. Interior Units: Chemically treat surfaces and apply one coat of primer.
2. Exterior Units: Hot-dipped galvanized in compliance with ASTM A623. Phosphatize or
surface treat after galvanizing, and apply one coat of primer.
3. Primer: Rust-inhibitive, baked, smooth finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate door and frame [and glazed light frames] fabrication and installation with Division 08
Section "Hardware", including electrified hardware [Division 08 Section "Glazing"] [and Division
08 Section "Flush Wood Doors"].
B.
[Coordinate door and frame fabrication with [security/card access] [and] [fire alarm] items in
Division 16.]
C.
Coordinate setting of steel frames and anchor placement with wall construction.
3.02 EXAMINATION
3.03 <EXAMINE SUBFRAMES AND CONDITIONS UNDER WHICH DOORS AND FRAMES ARE TO
BE INSTALLED. PROCEED WITH THE WORK ONLY WHEN SUBFRAMES AND CONDITIONS
ARE SATISFACTORY.>
3.04 INSTALLATION
A.
Install doors and frames [and glazed light frames] in accordance with HMMA 840 and with
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
B.
In addition, install fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80 and the
manufacturer's fire test report installation data.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
081113 - 3
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Remove and replace doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage, installation and
construction.
1. Paste filler repair is not permitted.
2. Touch up scratched paint surfaces after installation.
D.
Protection: Protect metal surfaces after installation. At Substantial Completion, doors and
frames shall be without indication of use, deterioration, or damage.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
081113 - 4
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 083100
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Access door and frame units, ______, in wall and ceiling locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCESS DOOR AND PANEL APPLICATIONS
A.
Walls, Unless Otherwise Indicated:
2.02 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Access Doors:
1. Acudor Products Inc; Product ____: www.acudor.com.
2. Karp Associates, Inc; Product ____: www.karpinc.com.
3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc; Product ____:
www.milcorinc.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.03 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
A.
All Units: Factory fabricated, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground
flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be
installed in.
2.04 WALL AND CEILING UNITS
A.
Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints
welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with
assemblies units are to be installed in.
1. Material: Steel.
2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges.
3. Material: Steel.
B.
Door and Frame Units: Formed steel.
1. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel.
2. Door panels: 0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet.
3. Steel Finish: Primed.
4. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color.
5. Sizes:
a. Walls: ________ inches.
1) 3'-0" wide x 3'-0" high for roof attic space access doors
(a) Provide with louver for attic space access doors
b. Ceilings and Soffits: 30" x30" inches.
c. Lay-in Grid Ceilings: To match grid module.
6. Hardware:
a. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type.
b. Lock: Cylinder lock with latch, two keys for each unit. Keyed to Owner master lock.
7. Prime coat with alkyd primer.
8. Weatherstriping all around, flashed sill with end dams.
9. Finish: One coat baked enamel, ________ color.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
083100 - 1
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place.
C.
Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
083100 - 2
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 084313
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass.
B.
Aluminum doors .
C.
Weatherstripping.
D.
Perimeter sealant.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 079005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.
B.
Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Cylinders.
C.
Section 088000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
B.
AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for
Water Leakage; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2009 (part of AAMA 501).
C.
AAMA 611 - Voluntary Specification for Anodized Architectural Aluminum; American
Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2012.
D.
AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance
of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; American Architectural Manufacturers
Association; 2009.
E.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
F.
ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and
Steel Products; 2012.
G.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2012.
H.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2012.
I.
ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior
Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).
J.
ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors,
Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved
2010).
K.
ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,
Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).
L.
SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for
Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).
1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or
permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, using loads 1.5 times the design
wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
1. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction, with
full recovery of glazing materials.
B.
Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection
of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
084313 - 1
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at a reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in
accordance with ASTM E 283.
D.
Condensation Resistance Factor: CRF of 45 when measured in accordance with AAMA
1503.1.
E.
Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure
difference of 2.86 lbf/sq ft.
F.
System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
G.
Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing
detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,
anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details .
C.
Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,
affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding
required.
D.
Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering
calculations, dimensional limitations.
E.
Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each
door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.
F.
Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface,
glass, infill panels, glazing materials.
G.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified
requirements.
H.
Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in FT 1463
Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct
supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and
licensed at Texas.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.
B.
Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed
coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this
minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.
Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
084313 - 2
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING
A.
Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken:
1. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.
2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN -- SWINGING DOORS
A.
Narrow Stile, Insulating Glazing, Thermally-Broken:
2.03 MANUFACTURERS
A.
__________; Product ___________.
B.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront and Doors:
1. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc; U.S. Aluminum: www.crl-arch.com.
2. Kawneer North America: www.kawneer.com.
3. United States Aluminum Corp: www.usalum.com.
4. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope: www.oldcastlebe.com.
5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 STOREFRONT
A.
Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members
with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.
1. Finish Color: As scheduled.
2. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and
secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealed
from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.
3. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration
harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.
4. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
5. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without
causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building
elements.
6. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, without
damage to components or deterioration of seals.
7. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent
construction while allowing expected movement.
8. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout
assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel and
heel bead of glazing compound.
9. Preparation for Window Treatments: Provide reinforced interior horizontal head rail.
B.
Performance Requirements:
1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements
without damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using
loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.
a. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,
with full recovery of glazing materials.
2. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in
accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8.00 lbf/sq ft.
3. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and
deflection of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals.
4. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,
measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM
E283.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
084313 - 3
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
5.
6.
7.
For Construction
09-24-13
Water Leakage: None, when measured in accordance with ASTM E331 at specified
pressure differential.
System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any
water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture
occurring within system.
Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components
caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without
causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building
elements.
2.05 COMPONENTS
A.
Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, thermally broken with interior section
insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system.
1. Glazing stops: Flush.
2. Cross-Section: 2 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension.
3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of
structural steel member.
4. End dams at all sills.
5. Rigid plastic jamb back inserts at all jambs adjacent to framing.
B.
Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 - Glazing.
C.
Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum.
1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.
2. Top Rail: 3-1/2 inches wide.
3. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2 inches wide.
4. Bottom Rail: 6-1/2 inches wide.
5. Glazing Stops: Square.
6. Finish: Same as storefront.
2.06 MATERIALS
A.
Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).
B.
Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of
ASTM A123/A123M.
C.
Fasteners: Stainless steel.
D.
Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick stainless steel.
E.
Perimeter Sealant: Type ES4 specified in Section 079005.
F.
Glass: As specified in Section 088000.
G.
Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration
requirements.
H.
Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 088000.
I.
Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.
2.07 FINISHES
A.
Class I Color Anodized Finish: AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A42 Integrally colored anodic coating or
AAMA 612 electrolytically deposited colored anodic coating with electrolytically deposited
organic seal; not less than 0.7 mils thick.
B.
Color: As shown on the drawings.
2.08 HARDWARE
A.
Other Door Hardware: As specified in Section .
B.
Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.
C.
Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
084313 - 4
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
D.
For Construction
09-24-13
Threshold: Extruded aluminum, one piece per door opening, ribbed surface; provide on all
doors.
2.09 FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of
assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
B.
Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof.
C.
Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors.
D.
Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar
metals with bituminous paint.
E.
Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view.
F.
Reinforce components internally for door hardware .
G.
Reinforce framing members for imposed loads.
H.
Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.
1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in
completed assemblies, including joint edges.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
B.
Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of
this section.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and
other irregularities.
C.
Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.
D.
Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional
tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.
E.
Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
F.
Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.
G.
Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads
to sill flashing.
H.
Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.
I.
Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of
thermal barrier.
J.
Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.
K.
Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 088000, using glazing method required
to achieve performance criteria.
L.
Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 079005.
M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be
satisfactorily repaired.
3.03 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,
whichever is less.
B.
Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
084313 - 5
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.
3.05 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.
3.06 CLEANING
A.
Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.
B.
Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean
wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.
C.
Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
084313 - 6
ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 087100
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Hardware for hollow steel doors.
B.
Hardware for fire-rated doors.
C.
Electrically operated and controlled hardware.
D.
Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.
E.
Thresholds.
F.
Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 081113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
B.
Section 084313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Hardware for same except cylinders;
installation of cylinders.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2008 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).
B.
BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware
Manufacturers Association; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).
C.
BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders;
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2010 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).
D.
BHMA A156.22 - American National Standard for Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems,
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/BHMA A156.22).
E.
DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors
and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.
F.
NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives; 2013.
G.
UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.
1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products onto which door hardware
will be installed.
B.
Convey FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's keying requirements to manufacturers.
C.
Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week prior to commencing work
of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Samples: Prior to preparation of hardware schedule:
1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, and closer illustrating style, color, and finish.
2. Samples will be returned to supplier.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door
hardware with three years of experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to
match hardware schedule.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
087100 - 1
DOOR HARDWARE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
1.08 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of
internal reinforcement for door hardware.
B.
Furnish templates for door and frame preparation.
C.
Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
manner.
D.
Coordinate FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's keying requirements during the course of
the Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BASIS OF DESIGN
2.02 DOOR HARDWARE - GENERAL
A.
Provide all hardware specified or required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to the extent indicated.
B.
Provide all items of a single type of the same model by the same manufacturer.
C.
Provide products that comply with the following:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80.
3. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors : Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose
specified and indicated.
4. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide
hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the
applicable code.
2.03 HINGES
A.
Hinges: Provide hinges on every swinging door.
1. Provide five-knuckle full mortise butt hinges unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide ball-bearing hinges at all doors having closers.
3. Provide hinges in the quantities indicated.
4. Provide non-removable pins on exterior outswinging doors.
B.
Quantity of Hinges Per Door:
1. Doors up to 60 inches High: Two hinges.
2. Doors From 60 inches High up to 90 inches High: Three hinges.
3. Doors 90 inches High up to 120 inches High: Four hinges.
4. Doors over 120 inches High: One additional hinge per each additional 30 inches in height.
C.
Manufacturers - Hinges:
1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com.
2. Hager Companies: www.hagerco.com.
3. Stanley Black & Decker: www.stanleyblackanddecker.com.
4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.04 PUSH/PULLS
A.
Push/Pulls: Comply with BHMA A156.6.
1. Provide push and pull on doors not specified to have lockset, latchset, exit device, or
auxiliary lock.
2. On solid doors, provide matching push plate and pull plate on opposite faces.
2.05 LOCKS AND LATCHES
A.
Locks: Provide a lock for every door, unless specifically indicated as not requiring locking.
1. Hardware Sets indicate locking functions required for each door.
2. If no hardware set is indicated for a swinging door provide an office lockset.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
087100 - 2
DOOR HARDWARE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
3.
4.
For Construction
09-24-13
Trim: Provide lever handle or pull trim on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to
have no outside trim.
Lock Cylinders: Provide key access on outside of all locks unless specifically stated to
have no locking or no outside trim.
B.
Lock Cylinders: Manufacturer’s standard tumbler type, six-pin standard core.
1. Provide cams and/or tailpieces as required for locking devices required.
C.
Keying: Grand master keyed.
D.
Latches: Provide a latch for every door that is not required to lock, unless specifically indicated
"push/pull" or "not required to latch".
2.06 CLOSERS
A.
Closers: Complying with BHMA A156.4.
1. Provide surface-mounted, door-mounted closers unless otherwise indicated.
2. Provide a door closer on every exterior door.
3. Provide a door closer on every fire- and smoke-rated door. Spring hinges are not an
acceptable self-closing device unless specifically so indicated.
4. On pairs of swinging doors, if an overlapping astragal is present, provide coordinator to
ensure the leaves close in proper order.
2.07 STOPS AND HOLDERS
A.
Stops: Complying with BHMA A156.8; provide a stop for every swinging door, unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Provide wall stops, unless otherwise indicated.
2. If wall stops are not practical, due to configuration of room or furnishings, provide
overhead stop.
3. Stop is not required if positive stop feature is specified for door closer; positive stop feature
of door closer is not an acceptable substitute for a stop unless specifically so stated.
B.
Wall Stops:
C.
Floor Stops:
2.08 GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS
A.
Gaskets: Complying with BHMA A156.22.
1. On each door in smoke partition, provide smoke gaskets; top, sides, and meeting stile of
pairs. If fire/smoke partitions are not indicated on drawings, provide smoke gaskets on
each door identified as a "smoke door" and 20-minute rated fire doors.
2. On each exterior door, provide weatherstripping gaskets, unless otherwise indicated; top,
sides, and meeting stiles of pairs.
a. Where exterior door is also required to have fire or smoke rating, provide gaskets
functioning as both smoke and weather seals.
3. On each exterior door, provide door bottom sweep, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Thresholds:
1. At each exterior door, provide a threshold unless otherwise indicated.
2.09 PROTECTION PLATES AND ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A.
Protection Plates:
1. Kickplate: Provide on push side of every door with closer, except storefront and all-glass
doors.
B.
Drip Guard: Provide projecting drip guard over all exterior doors unless they are under a
projecting roof or canopy.
2.10 KEY CONTROLS
A.
Key Management System: For each keyed lock on project, provide one set of consecutively
numbered duplicate key tags with hanging hole and snap catch.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
087100 - 3
DOOR HARDWARE
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
B.
For Construction
09-24-13
Fire Department Lock Box: Heavy-duty, surface mounted, solid stainless-steel box with hinged
door and interior gasket seal; single drill resistant lock with dust covers and tamper alarm.
1. Capacity: Holds 10 keys.
2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard dark bronze.
3. Products:
a. Knox Company; Knox-Box Rapid Entry System, Model _______: www.knoxbox.com.
b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work; labeled, fire-rated doors and frames are
present and properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
B.
Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct
characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B.
Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C.
Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80.
D.
Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in
Schedule, unless otherwise noted:
1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."
3.03 ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust work under provisions of Section 017000.
B.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
3.04 CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. Clean finished hardware per
manufacturer's instructions after final adjustments has been made. Replace items that cannot
be cleaned to manufacturer's level of finish quality at no additional cost.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 017000.
B.
Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
3.06 SCHEDULE - ATTACHED.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
087100 - 4
DOOR HARDWARE
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 088000
GLAZING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Glass.
B.
Glazing compounds and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 084313 - Aluminum-Framed Storefronts: Glazing furnished by storefront manufacturer.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,
Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
B.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
C.
ASTM C1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2013.
D.
ASTM E1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings;
2012a.
E.
ASTM E2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;
2010.
F.
GANA (SM) - GANA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,
size limitations, special handling or installation requirements.
C.
Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
D.
Samples: Submit two samples __ x __ inch in size of glass and plastic units, showing coloration
and design.
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that ________ glass meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F.
1.06 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal
failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLAZING TYPES
A.
Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, low-E.
1. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
3. Between-lite space filled with air.
4. Basis of Design: PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.
5. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick, minimum.
a. Coating: PPG Solarban 60 on # 2 surface, no coating on #3 surface.
b. Tint: None (clear).
6. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick.
a. Tint: None (clear).
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
088000 - 1
GLAZING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
7.
For Construction
09-24-13
Total Thickness: 1 inch.
2.02 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES
A.
Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads
acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with ________
code.
1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness.
2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery
of glazing materials.
3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.
2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS
A.
Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
1. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
2. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
3. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
4. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
2.04 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A.
Silicone Sealant (Type ___): Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion
without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class
25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; ________ color.
2.05 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A.
Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I.
Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet
space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.
B.
Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.
Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self
adhesive on one face.
C.
Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; ____x____ inch size; black color.
D.
Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM
C864 Option I; ________ color.
E.
Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
B.
Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may
impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
B.
Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and GANA Sealant Manual.
C.
Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 GLAZING METHODS
3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)
A.
Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners.
B.
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to
attain full contact.
C.
Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous
contact.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
088000 - 2
GLAZING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
3.05 CLEANING
A.
Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
B.
Remove labels after Work is complete.
C.
Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
088000 - 3
GLAZING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 092236.23
METAL LATH
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal lath for Portland cement and gypsum plaster.
B.
Metal lath for portland cement plaster.
C.
Furring for metal lath.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath; 2012.
B.
ASTM C1002 - Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs;
2007.
C.
ASTM C1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior
and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2012a.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on furring and lathing components, structural characteristics,
material limitations, and finish.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Metal Lath:
1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; Product ____: www.amico-online.com.
2. Dietrich Metal Framing; Product ____: www.dietrichindustries.com.
3. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2.02 FRAMING AND LATH ASSEMBLIES
A.
Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:
1. Maximum Deflection of Vertical Assemblies: 1:360 under lateral point load of 100 lbs.
2. Maximum Deflection of Horizontal Assemblies: 1:240 deflection under dead loads and
wind uplift.
2.03 LATH
A.
Diamond Mesh Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized; self-furring.
1. Weight: To suit application, comply with deflection criteria, and as specified in ASTM C841
for framing spacing.
2. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq yd.
3. Backed with treated paper.
B.
Corner Mesh: Formed sheet steel, minimum 0.018 inch thick, perforated flanges shaped to
permit complete embedding in plaster, minimum 2 inch size; same finish as lath.
C.
Strip Mesh: Expanded metal lath, same weight as lath, 2 inch wide x 24 inch long; same finish
as lath.
D.
Beads, Screeds, Joint Accessories, and Other Trim: Depth governed by plaster thickness,
maximum possible lengths.
1. Material: Formed sheet steel with rust inhibitive primer, expanded metal flanges.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Fasteners: ASTM C1002 self-piercing tapping screws.
B.
Polyethylene Sheet: Clear, 6 mil thick.
C.
Tie Wire: Annealed galvanized steel.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
092236.23 - 1
METAL LATH
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Verify that substrates are ready to receive work and conditions are suitable for application.
C.
For exterior plaster and stucco on stud walls, verify that water-resistive barrier has been
installed over sheathing substrate completely and correctly.
D.
Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.
E.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory
preparation before proceeding.
3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A.
Install lath and furring in accordance with ASTM C 841.
B.
Install lath and furring for Portland cement plaster in accordance with ASTM C1063.
3.03 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS
A.
Locate joints as indicated on drawings.
3.04 LATH INSTALLATION
A.
Apply metal lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports.
B.
Lap ends minimum 1 inch. Secure end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports.
C.
Attach metal lath to wood supports using nails at maximum 16____ inches on center.
D.
Continuously reinforce internal angles with corner mesh, except where the metal lath returns 3
inches from corner to form the angle reinforcement; fasten at perimeter edges only.
E.
Place corner bead at external wall corners; fasten at outer edges of lath only.
F.
Place base screeds at termination of plaster areas; secure rigidly in place.
G.
Place 4 inch wide strips of metal lath centered over junctions of dissimilar backing materials.
Secure rigidly in place.
H.
Place lath vertically above each top corner and each side of door frames to 6 inches above
ceiling line.
I.
Place casing beads at terminations of plaster finish. Butt and align ends. Secure rigidly in
place.
J.
Place additional strip mesh diagonally at corners of lathed openings. Secure rigidly in place.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
092236.23 - 2
METAL LATH
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 092400
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Portland cement plaster for installation over metal lath and solid surfaces.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 092236.23 - Metal Lath: Metal furring and lathing for plaster.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM C91/C91M - Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2012.
B.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
C.
ASTM C206 - Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2003 (Reapproved 2009).
D.
ASTM C926 - Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2012a.
E.
ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior
Plastering; 2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on plaster materials, characteristics and limitations of products
specified.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER ASSEMBLIES
A.
Exterior Stucco: Portland cement plaster system, made of finish, brown, and scratch coat and
reinforcing mesh.
1. Provide weather resistive barrier and air barrier as part of the system, by the same
manufacturer.
2.02 PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement, Aggregates, and Other Materials: In accordance with ASTM C926.
B.
Premixed Plaster for Stucco Scratch, Brown, and Finish Coats: Complying with material
requirements of ASTM C926.
C.
Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
D.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C91 Type N.
E.
Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.
F.
Aggregate: Natural sand, within the following sieve sizes and percentage retained limits:
G.
Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free of mineral or organic matter that could adversely affect
plaster.
H.
Bonding Agent: ASTM C932; type recommended for bonding plaster to concrete surfaces;
________ manufactured by ____________.
2.03 METAL LATH
A.
Metal Lath and Accessories: As specified in Section 092236.23. Use metal lath as plaster base
at _________.
B.
Beads, Screeds, and Joint Accessories: As specified in Section 092236.23.
2.04 PLASTER MIXES
A.
Over Metal Lath: Three-coat application, mixed and proportioned in accordance with ASTM
C926.
B.
Mix only as much plaster as can be used prior to initial set.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
092400 - 1
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
D.
Protect mixtures from freezing, frost, contamination, and excessive evaporation.
E.
Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify the suitability of existing conditions before starting work.
B.
Masonry: Verify joints are cut flush and surface is ready to receive work of this section. Verify
no bituminous or water repellent coatings exist on masonry surface.
C.
Metal Lath and Accessories: Verify lath is flat, secured to substrate, and joint and surface
perimeter accessories are in place.
3.02 PREPARATION
3.03 PLASTERING
A.
Apply plaster in accordance with ASTM C926.
B.
Moist cure base coats.
C.
Apply second coat immediately following initial set of first coat.
D.
After curing, dampen previous coat prior to applying finish coat.
E.
Avoid excessive working of surface. Delay troweling as long as possible to avoid drawing
excess fines to surface.
F.
Moist cure finish coat for minimum period of 48 hours.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
092400 - 2
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 099000
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface preparation.
B.
Field application of paints, stains, and other coatings.
C.
Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and
unless otherwise indicated, including the following:
1. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles.
D.
Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of
equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically so indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
40 CFR 59, Subpart D - National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for
each:
1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category
(e.g. "alkyd enamel").
2. MPI product number (e.g. MPI #47).
3. Cross-reference to specified paint system(s) product is to be used in; include description of
each system.
4. Show on Mock-up for painted finishes, and provide "draw down" samples for other painted
surfaces.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
B.
Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of
substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.
C.
Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the
humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
D.
Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same
manufacturer; no exceptions.
B.
Paints:
1. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com.
C.
Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
099000 - 1
PAINTING AND COATING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL
A.
Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.
1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties,
and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a
single production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
B.
Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use
primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.
C.
Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the
following:
a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
Architectural Coatings.
2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added
at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR
A.
Paint EC-OP - All Exterior Concrete and Masonry Surfaces Indicated to be Painted, Unless
Otherwise Indicated: Including concrete, concrete masonry, brick, cement board, and _____.
1. Preparation as specified by manufacturer.
2. Two top coats and one coat primer recommended by manufacturer.
3. Top Coat(s): MPI Exterior Pigmented Elastomeric, Water Based (MPI #113), flat.
4. Satin: MPI gloss level 4; use this sheen at all locations.
5. Primer On Concrete and Concrete Masonry: One heavy coat latex block filler (100 percent
acrylic) squeegeed into pores.
B.
Paint GE-OP-3L - Gypsum Board and Plaster, Opaque, Latex, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of latex primer sealer.
2. Flat: Two coats of latex; ____.
C.
Paint ME-OP-3A - Ferrous Metals, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat of alkyd primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.
D.
Paint ME-OP-2A - Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. Touch-up with rust-inhibitive primer recommended by top coat manufacturer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.
E.
Paint MgE-OP-3A - Galvanized Metals, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat galvanize primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.
F.
Paint MaE-OP-3A - Aluminum and Copper, Unprimed, Alkyd, 3 Coat:
1. One coat etching primer.
2. Semi-gloss: Two coats of alkyd enamel; ____.
G.
Paint MaE-OP-2A - Aluminum and Copper, Unprimed, Alkyd, 2 Coat:
1. One coat etching primer.
2. Semi-gloss: One coat of alkyd enamel; ____.
H.
Paint Copper-Ox - Copper, Natural Oxidized Finish:
1. Rub on oxidizing solution of copper acetate and ammonium chloride in acetic acid, until
required effect is achieved.
2. Rinse surfaces with clear water and allow to dry.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
099000 - 2
PAINTING AND COATING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
I.
For Construction
09-24-13
Paint E-Pav - Pavement Marking Paint:
1. White: One coat, with reflective particles; ________.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C.
Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
D.
Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
E.
Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate
and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
F.
Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or
alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium
phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding
metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.
G.
Exterior Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter.
Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior calking
compound after prime coat has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before
installation.
3.02 APPLICATION
A.
Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: If final painting must be delayed more than 2 weeks
after installation of woodwork, apply primer within 2 weeks and final coating within 4 weeks.
B.
Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C.
Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
applied.
D.
Apply each coat to uniform appearance.
E.
Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
F.
Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior
to applying next coat.
G.
Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
prior to finishing.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
099000 - 3
PAINTING AND COATING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 312200
GRADING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Removal and storage of topsoil.
B.
Rough grading the site for building pads and site improvements.
C.
Finish grading for planting.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312323 - Fill: Filling and compaction.
B.
Section 312316.13 - Trenching: Trenching and backfilling for utilities.
C.
Section 329223 - Sodding: Finish ground cover.
D.
Section 329300 - Plants: Topsoil in beds and pits.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of utilities remaining by
horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform Work in accordance with State of Texas, Highway Department standards.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Protect above- and below-grade utilities that remain.
B.
Protect bench marks, survey control points, paving, and curbs from grading equipment and
vehicular traffic.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site.
1. Graded.
2. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter.
B.
Other Fill Materials: See Section 312323.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.
B.
Stake and flag locations of known utilities.
C.
Locate, identify, and protect from damage above- and below-grade utilities to remain.
D.
Protect trees to remain by providing substantial fencing around entire tree at the outer tips of its
branches; no grading is to be performed inside this line.
3.03 ROUGH GRADING
A.
Remove topsoil from entire site, without mixing with foreign materials.
B.
Do not remove topsoil when wet.
C.
Remove subsoil from areas to be further excavated, re-landscaped, or re-graded.
D.
Do not remove wet subsoil, unless it is subsequently processed to obtain optimum moisture
content.
E.
When excavating through roots, perform work by hand and cut roots with sharp axe.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
312200 - 1
GRADING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
F.
See Section 312323 for filling procedures.
G.
Stability: Replace damaged or displaced subsoil to same requirements as for specified fill.
3.04 SOIL REMOVAL
A.
Stockpile topsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site.
B.
Stockpile subsoil to be re-used on site; remove remainder from site.
C.
Stockpiles: Use areas designated on site; pile depth not to exceed 8 feet; protect from erosion.
3.05 FINISH GRADING
A.
Before Finish Grading:
1. Verify building and trench backfilling have been inspected.
2. Verify subgrade has been contoured and compacted.
B.
Remove debris, roots, branches, stones, in excess of 1/2 inch in size. Remove soil
contaminated with petroleum products.
C.
Where topsoil is to be placed, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.
D.
In areas where vehicles or equipment have compacted soil, scarify surface to depth of 3 inches.
E.
Place topsoil in areas where sodding and planting are indicated.
F.
Place topsoil to the following compacted thicknesses:
1. Areas to be Sodded: 4 inches.
2. Shrub Beds: 18 inches.
G.
Place topsoil during dry weather.
H.
Remove roots, weeds, rocks, and foreign material while spreading.
I.
Near plants spread topsoil manually to prevent damage.
J.
Fine grade topsoil to eliminate uneven areas and low spots. Maintain profiles and contour of
subgrade.
K.
Lightly compact placed topsoil.
3.06 TOLERANCES
A.
Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 0.10 foot (1-3/16 inches) from required elevation.
B.
Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 0.04 foot (1/2 inch).
C.
Top Surface of Subgrade: Plus or minus 1/10 foot from required elevation.
D.
Top Surface of Finish Grade: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Remove unused stockpiled topsoil and subsoil. Grade stockpile area to prevent standing water.
B.
Leave site clean and raked, ready to receive landscaping.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
312200 - 2
GRADING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 312316
EXCAVATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Excavating for pile caps, slabs-on-grade, and utilities within the building.
B.
Trenching for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312200 - Grading: Grading.
B.
Section 312323 - Fill: Fill materials, filling, and compacting.
1.03 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
B.
Protect bench marks, survey control points, paving, and curbs from excavating equipment and
vehicular traffic.
PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B.
See Section 312200 for additional requirements.
3.02 EXCAVATING
A.
Excavate to accommodate new structures and construction operations.
B.
Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until
notified to resume work.
C.
Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.
D.
Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
E.
Cut utility trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.
F.
Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.
G.
Correct areas that are over-excavated and load-bearing surfaces that are disturbed; see
Section 312323.
H.
Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation.
I.
Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.
J.
Remove excess excavated material from site.
3.03 PROTECTION
A.
Prevent displacement of banks and keep loose soil from falling into excavation; maintain soil
stability.
B.
Protect bottom of excavations and soil adjacent to and beneath foundation from freezing.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
312316 - 1
EXCAVATION
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 312316.13
TRENCHING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg
(10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials; 2010
B.
ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012.
C.
ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method; 2007.
D.
ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012.
E.
ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method; 2008.
F.
ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005.
G.
ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A.
Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.
B.
Subgrade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B.
Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Civil Drawings and Geotechnical Report
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the work are as indicated.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B.
See Section 312200 for additional requirements.
3.03 TRENCHING
A.
Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until
notified to resume work.
B.
Slope banks of excavations deeper than 4 feet to angle of repose or less until shored.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
312316.13 - 1
TRENCHING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Do not interfere with 45 degree bearing splay of foundations.
D.
Cut trenches wide enough to allow inspection of installed utilities.
E.
Hand trim excavations. Remove loose matter.
F.
Remove excavated material that is unsuitable for re-use from site.
G.
Remove excess excavated material from site.
3.04 PREPARATION FOR UTILITY PLACEMENT
A.
Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.
B.
Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
C.
Until ready to backfill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.
3.05 BACKFILLING
A.
Backfill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.
B.
Fill up to subgrade elevations unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
D.
Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet,
frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
E.
Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.
F.
Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make
gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
G.
Correct areas that are over-excavated.
1. Thrust bearing surfaces: Fill with concrete.
2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97
percent of maximum dry density.
H.
Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
I.
Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and
testing.
B.
Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM
D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017.
C.
Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in
accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or
AASHTO T 180.
D.
If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.
E.
Frequency of Tests: ________.
3.07 CLEANING
A.
Leave unused materials in a neat, compact stockpile.
B.
Remove unused stockpiled materials, leave area in a clean and neat condition. Grade stockpile
area to prevent standing surface water.
C.
Leave borrow areas in a clean and neat condition. Grade to prevent standing surface water.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
312316.13 - 2
TRENCHING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 312323
FILL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Filling, backfilling, and compacting for slabs-on-grade, paving, and utilities within the building.
B.
Backfilling and compacting for utilities outside the building to utility main connections.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312200 - Grading: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used.
B.
Section 312200 - Grading: Site grading.
C.
Section 312316 - Excavation: Removal and handling of soil to be re-used.
D.
Section 312316.13 - Trenching: Excavating for utility trenches outside the building to utility main
connections.
E.
Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AASHTO T 180 - Standard Specification for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54 kg
(10-lb) Rammer and a 457 mm (18 in.) Drop; American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials; 2010
B.
ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012.
C.
ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method; 2007.
D.
ASTM D1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2012.
E.
ASTM D2167 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Rubber Balloon Method; 2008.
F.
ASTM D2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified
Soil Classification System); 2011.
G.
ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by
Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005.
H.
ASTM D3017 - Standard Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear
Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005.
1.04 DEFINITIONS
A.
Finish Grade Elevations: Indicated on drawings.
B.
Subgrade Elevations: 4 inches below finish grade elevations indicated on drawings, unless
otherwise indicated.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Compaction Density Test Reports.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
When necessary, store materials on site in advance of need.
B.
When fill materials need to be stored on site, locate stockpiles where indicated.
1. Separate differing materials with dividers or stockpile separately to prevent intermixing.
2. Prevent contamination.
3. Protect stockpiles from erosion and deterioration of materials.
C.
Verify that survey bench marks and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
312323 - 1
FILL
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FILL MATERIALS
A.
General Fill: Subsoil excavated on-site.
1. Graded.
2. Free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rocks larger than 2 inches, and debris.
3. Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL.
B.
Granular Fill : Pit run washed stone; free of shale, clay, friable material and debris.
1. Graded in accordance with ASTM D2487 Group Symbol GW.
C.
Topsoil: Topsoil excavated on-site.
1. Select.
2. Graded.
3. Free of roots, rocks larger than 1/2 inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for testing and analysis
of soil material.
B.
If tests indicate materials do not meet specified requirements, change material and retest.
C.
Provide materials of each type from same source throughout the Work.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum locations.
B.
See Section 312200 for additional requirements.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Scarify subgrade surface to a depth of 6 inches to identify soft spots.
B.
Cut out soft areas of subgrade not capable of compaction in place. Backfill with general fill.
C.
Compact subgrade to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent fill material.
D.
Until ready to fill, maintain excavations and prevent loose soil from falling into excavation.
3.03 FILLING
A.
Fill to contours and elevations indicated using unfrozen materials.
B.
Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage other work.
C.
Systematically fill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not fill over porous, wet,
frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.
D.
Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials to attain required compaction density.
E.
Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make
gradual grade changes. Blend slope into level areas.
F.
Correct areas that are over-excavated.
1. Load-bearing foundation surfaces: Fill with concrete.
2. Other areas: Use general fill, flush to required elevation, compacted to minimum 97
percent of maximum dry density.
G.
Compaction Density Unless Otherwise Specified or Indicated:
1. Under paving, slabs-on-grade, and similar construction: 97 percent of maximum dry
density.
2. At other locations: 95 percent of maximum dry density.
H.
Reshape and re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.04 FILL AT SPECIFIC LOCATIONS
A.
Use general fill unless otherwise specified or indicated.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
312323 - 2
FILL
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Under Interior Slabs-On-Grade:
1. Use granular fill.
2. Depth: 4 inches deep.
3. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
C.
Over Buried Utility Piping and Conduits in Trenches :
1. Bedding: Use granular fill.
2. Cover with general fill.
3. Fill up to subgrade elevation.
4. Compact in maximum 8 inch lifts to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
D.
At Lawn Areas:
1. Use general fill.
2. Compact to 95 percent of maximum dry density.
3. See Section 312200 for topsoil placement.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field inspection and
testing.
B.
Perform compaction density testing on compacted fill in accordance with ASTM D1556, ASTM
D2167, ASTM D2922, or ASTM D3017.
C.
Evaluate results in relation to compaction curve determined by testing uncompacted material in
accordance with ASTM D698 ("standard Proctor"), ASTM D1557 ("modified Proctor"), or
AASHTO T 180.
D.
If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest.
E.
Frequency of Tests: ________.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
312323 - 3
FILL
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 313213.19
LIME SOIL STABILIZATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Excavating, treatment, and placement of lime treated subsoil mix.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312316 - Excavation: General site and building excavation.
B.
Section 312316.13 - Trenching: Backfilling of utility trenches.
C.
Section 312316.26 - Rock Removal.
D.
Section 312323 - Fill: General site and building backfilling.
E.
Section 312323 - Fill: Soil and aggregate materials.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AASHTO M 216 - Standard Specification for Lime for Soil Stabilization; American Association of
State Highway and Transportation Officials; 2005.
B.
ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using
Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)); 2012.
C.
ASTM D1556 - Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the
Sand-Cone Method; 2007.
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install mixed materials in wind in excess of 10 mph or when temperature is below 40
degrees F.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MIX MATERIALS
A.
Coarse Aggregate: Granular fill specified in Section 312323.
B.
Fine Aggregate: Sand fill specified in Section 312323.
C.
Subsoil: General fill specified in Section 312323.
D.
Subsoil: Existing reused.
E.
Lime: AASHTO M 216 hydrated lime.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Curing Seal: Asphalt emulsion primer.
B.
Geotextile Fabric: Non-woven polypropylene. Provide ________ manufactured by ________.
2.03 EQUIPMENT
A.
Equipment: Capable of excavating subsoil, mixing and placing materials, wetting, consolidation,
and compaction of material.
2.04 LIME/SOIL MIX
A.
Mix materials in accordance with State of Texas Highways standard.
B.
Carefully add water to the mix to achieve a consistent mixture without lumping yet not create a
wet plastic consistency.
C.
Obtain approval of the mix by Materials Testing Lab before proceeding with placement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXCAVATION
A.
Protect adjacent structures from damage by this work.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
313213.19 - 1
LIME SOIL STABILIZATION
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Excavate subsoil to a depth sufficient to accommodate soil stabilization, construction
operations, and ________.
C.
Proof roll subgrade to identify soft areas; excavate those areas.
D.
Do not excavate within normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation.
E.
Notify Architect of unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue affected Work in area until
notified to resume work.
F.
Correct areas over-excavated in accordance with Section 312316.
3.02 SOIL TREATMENT AND BACKFILLING
A.
Site mix subsoil, backfill and compact. Blend treated subsoil mix to achieve mix formulation and
required stabilization.
B.
Mix and wait 16 hours minimum and no more than 72 hours maximum before placing.
C.
Place mix material in continuous layers not exceeding 12 inches depth.
D.
Maintain optimum moisture content of mix materials to attain required stabilization.
E.
Do not exceed 30 minutes in placing adjacent mixed material.
F.
Commence compaction of mix no later than 60 minutes after placement.
G.
Compact to 95 percent of maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D698; test
in-place density in accordance with ASTM D1556.
H.
Slope grade away from building minimum 2 inches in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise.
I.
Shape to required line, grade, and cross section.
J.
Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
K.
At end of day, terminate completed Work by forming a straight and vertical construction joint.
L.
Replace damaged fill with new mix to full depth of original mix.
M. Remove surplus mix materials from site.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 014000.
B.
Compression test and analysis of hardened fill material will be performed in accordance with
ASTM D698.
C.
If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest.
3.04 SCHEDULE
A.
Refer to Geotechnical Report, and site conditions, and schedule as required.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
313213.19 - 2
LIME SOIL STABILIZATION
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 316329
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Machine drilled shaft, belled base, rock sockets, and shear rings.
B.
Concrete and reinforcement.
C.
Shaft liner, if required.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Requirements for concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 336.1 - Standard Specification for the Construction of Drilled Piers; American Concrete
Institute International; 2001.
B.
ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.
C.
ASTM A252 - Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles; 2010.
D.
ASTM A283/A283M - Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon
Steel Plates; 2012.
E.
ASTM A929/A929M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip
Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of piers, pier diameter, and pier length.
Accurately record the following:
1. Sizes, lengths, and locations of piers and footing groups.
2. Sequence of placement.
3. Final base and top elevations.
4. Deviation from indicated locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Casing: Temporary casings of steel conforming to ASTM A283, Grade C; ASTM A36; or ASTM
A929; of sufficient strength to withstand handling and drilling stresses, concrete pressures, and
surrounding earth and water pressures.
B.
Shaft Liner: ASTM A252, Grade 1; single length steel pipe, with plain ends, of diameter and
wall thickness indicated.
C.
Concrete Materials and Mix: Specified in Section 033000.
D.
Equipment: Appropriate for dewatering excavated shaft.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Construct piers in accordance with ACI 336.1.
B.
Drill vertical pier shafts to diameters and depths indicated.
C.
Place steel casings immediately after drilling. Set firmly in place. If casing is to be temporary,
install shaft liner with sufficient strength to withstand concrete pressures.
1. Withdrawal of temporary casings is at option of Contractor.
D.
Clean shaft and bottom of loose material. Maintain shafts free of water.
E.
Allow inspection of shaft prior to placement of reinforcement and concrete.
F.
Place reinforcing steel in accordance with Section 032000.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
316329 - 1
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
G.
Place concrete in single pour, in accordance with Section 033000 with equipment designed for
vertical placement of concrete.
H.
Coordinate casing withdrawal with concrete placement so that concrete pressure head exceeds
anticipated outside soil and water pressure above bottom of casing at all times during
withdrawal.
I.
Set tops of piles to elevations indicated.
3.02 TOLERANCES
A.
Install piers with maximum variation from location, plumbness, bottom area, diameter, and
anchorage locations as specified in ACI 336.1.
B.
Maximum Variation From Vertical: 1 in 48.
C.
Maximum Variation From Design Top Elevation: Plus 3 inches, minus 1 inch.
D.
Maximum Out-of-Position: 2 inches.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 014000.
B.
Test Piers: Same diameter and type as specified for other piers, placed in same manner.
C.
Accepted test piers may not be used in the Work.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
316329 - 2
DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 321313
CONCRETE PAVING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Concrete sidewalks, integral curbs, gutters, and parking areas.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 079005 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for joints.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ACI 211.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002).
B.
ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
International; 2010.
C.
ACI 304R - Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American
Concrete Institute International; 2000.
D.
ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
E.
ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
F.
ASTM A185/A185M - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for
Concrete; 2007.
G.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
H.
ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
I.
ASTM C39/C39M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens; 2012a.
J.
ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2012.
K.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
L.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
M. ASTM C494/C494M - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2012.
N.
ASTM C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
for Use in Concrete; 2012.
O.
ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved
2008).
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data on joint filler, admixtures, and curing compound.
C.
Design Data: Indicate pavement thickness, designed concrete strength, reinforcement, and
typical details.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Perform work in accordance with ACI 301.
B.
Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
C.
Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FORM MATERIALS
A.
Form Materials: Conform to ACI 301.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
321313 - 1
CONCRETE PAVING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
B.
For Construction
09-24-13
Joint Filler: Preformed; non-extruding bituminous type (ASTM D1751).
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished
finish.
B.
Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: Plain type, ASTM A185/A185M; in coiled rolls; unfinished.
C.
Dowels: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420); deformed billet steel bars; unfinished finish.
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A.
Cement: ASTM C150/C150M Normal - Type I portland type, grey color.
B.
Fine and Coarse Mix Aggregates: ASTM C33.
C.
Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class C or F.
D.
Water: Clean, and not detrimental to concrete.
E.
Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.
F.
Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494/C494M, Type A - Water Reducing, Type D - Water
Reducing and Retarding, Type E - Water Reducing and Accelerating, Type F - Water Reducing,
High Range, and Type G - Water Reducing, High Range and Retarding.
1. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by
weight of cement.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
2.05 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A.
Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations.
B.
Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates
recommended by manufacturer.
C.
Concrete Properties:
1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C39/C39M at 28 days:
4000 psi.
2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 25 percent of cementitious materials by weight.
3. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight.
4. Maximum Slump: 3 inches.
2.06 MIXING
A.
Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 SUBBASE
A.
See Section 321123 for construction of base course for work of this Section.
3.02 PREPARATION
A.
Moisten base to minimize absorption of water from fresh concrete.
B.
Notify Architect minimum 24 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations.
3.03 FORMING
A.
Place and secure forms to correct location, dimension, profile, and gradient.
B.
Assemble formwork to permit easy stripping and dismantling without damaging concrete.
C.
Place joint filler vertical in position, in straight lines. Secure to formwork during concrete
placement.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT
A.
Place reinforcement at midheight of slabs-on-grade.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
321313 - 2
CONCRETE PAVING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
B.
Interrupt reinforcement at contraction joints.
C.
Place dowels to achieve pavement and curb alignment as detailed.
For Construction
09-24-13
3.05 PLACING CONCRETE
A.
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R.
B.
Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts, formed joints are not disturbed during concrete
placement.
C.
Place concrete continuously over the full width of the panel and between predetermined
construction joints. Do not break or interrupt successive pours such that cold joints occur.
D.
Place concrete to pattern indicated.
3.06 JOINTS
A.
Align curb, gutter, and sidewalk joints.
B.
Place 3/8 inch wide expansion joints at 20 foot intervals and to separate paving from vertical
surfaces and other components and in pattern indicated.
1. Form joints with joint filler extending from bottom of pavement to within 1/2 inch of finished
surface.
2. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
C.
Saw cut contraction joints 3/16 inch wide at an optimum time after finishing. Cut 1/3 into depth
of slab.
3.07 FINISHING
A.
Sidewalk Paving: Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and
radiused edge 1/4 inch radius.
B.
Curbs and Gutters: Light broom, texture parallel to pavement direction.
C.
Inclined Vehicular Ramps: Broomed perpendicular to slope.
D.
Place curing compound on exposed concrete surfaces immediately after finishing. Apply in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.08 JOINT SEALING
A.
See Section 079005 for joint sealer requirements.
3.09 TOLERANCES
A.
Maximum Variation of Surface Flatness: 1/4 inch in 10 ft.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
An independent testing agency will perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section
014000.
1. Provide free access to concrete operations at project site and cooperate with appointed
firm.
2. Submit proposed mix design of each class of concrete to inspection and testing firm for
review prior to commencement of concrete operations.
3. Tests of concrete and concrete materials may be performed at any time to ensure
conformance with specified requirements.
B.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C39/C39M. For each test, mold and cure three concrete
test cylinders. Obtain test samples for every 100 cu yd or less of each class of concrete placed.
1. Take one additional test cylinder during cold weather concreting, cured on job site under
same conditions as concrete it represents.
2. Perform one slump test for each set of test cylinders taken.
C.
Maintain records of placed concrete items. Record date, location of pour, quantity, air
temperature, and test samples taken.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
321313 - 3
CONCRETE PAVING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
3.11 PROTECTION
A.
Immediately after placement, protect pavement from premature drying, excessive hot or cold
temperatures, and mechanical injury.
B.
Do not permit pedestrian traffic over pavement for 7 days minimum after finishing.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
321313 - 4
CONCRETE PAVING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 321713
PARKING BUMPERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Precast concrete parking bumpers and anchorage.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement; 2012.
B.
ASTM C33/C33M - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2011a.
C.
ASTM C150/C150M - Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2012.
D.
ASTM C260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2010a.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Parking Bumpers: Precast concrete, conforming to the following:
1. Cement: ASTM C150, Portland Type I - Normal; white color.
2. Concrete Materials: ASTM C33 aggregate, water, and sand.
3. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M, deformed steel bars; unfinished finish, strength
and size commensurate with precast unit design.
4. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260.
5. Concrete Mix: Minimum 5000 psi, 28 day strength, air entrained to 5 to 7 percent.
6. Use rigid molds, constructed to maintain precast units uniform in shape, size and finish.
Maintain consistent quality during manufacture.
7. Embed reinforcing steel, and drill or sleeve for two dowels.
8. Cure units to develop concrete quality, and to minimize appearance blemishes such as
non-uniformity, staining, or surface cracking.
9. Minor patching in plant is acceptable, providing appearance of units is not impaired.
B.
Dowels: Cut reinforcing steel, 1/2 inch diameter, ____ inch long, pointed tip.
C.
Adhesive: Epoxy type.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A.
Install units without damage to shape or finish. Replace or repair damaged units.
B.
Install units in alignment with adjacent work.
C.
Fasten units in place with 2 dowels per unit.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
321713 - 1
PARKING BUMPERS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 321723.13
PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Parking lot markings, including parking bays, crosswalks, arrows, handicapped symbols, and
curb markings.
B.
"No Parking" curb painting.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
FS TT-B-1325 - Beads (Glass Spheres); Retro-Reflective; Rev. D, 2007.
B.
MPI (APL) - Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators
Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.
C.
FHWA MUTCD - Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways; U.S.
Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration; http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov;
current edition.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Line and Zone Marking Paint: MPI No. 97 Latex Traffic Marking Paint; color(s) as indicated.
1. Parking Lots: White.
2. Handicapped Symbols: Blue.
B.
Reflective Glass Beads: FS TT-B-1325, Type I (low index of refraction), Gradation A (coarse,
drop-on); with silicone or other suitable waterproofing coating to ensure free flow.
C.
Temporary Marking Tape: Preformed, reflective, pressure sensitive adhesive tape in color(s)
required; Contractor is responsible for selection of material of sufficient durability as to perform
satisfactorily during period for which its use is required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best
result for the substrate under the project conditions.
B.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
1. Remove dust, dirt, and other granular surface deposits by sweeping, blowing with
compressed air, rinsing with water, or a combination of these methods.
C.
Where oil or grease are present, scrub affected areas with several applications of trisodium
phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser, and rinse thoroughly after each
application; after cleaning, seal oil-soaked areas with cut shellac to prevent bleeding through the
new paint.
D.
Establish survey control points to determine locations and dimensions of markings; provide
templates to control paint application by type and color at necessary intervals.
E.
Temporary Pavement Markings: When required or directed by Architect, apply temporary
markings of the color(s), width(s) and length(s) as indicated or directed.
1. After temporary marking has served its purpose, remove temporary marking by carefully
controlled sandblasting, approved grinding equipment, or other approved method so that
surface to which the marking was applied will not be damaged.
2. At Contractor's option, temporary marking tape may used in lieu of temporary painted
marking; remove unsatisfactory tape and replace with painted markings at no additional
cost to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Begin pavement marking as soon as practicable after surface has been cleaned and dried.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
321723.13 - 1
PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
B.
Do not apply paint if temperature of surface to be painted or the atmosphere is less than 50
degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.
C.
Apply in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using an experienced technician that is
thoroughly familiar with equipment, materials, and marking layouts.
D.
Comply with FHWA MUTCD manual (http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov) for details not shown.
E.
Apply markings in locations determined by measurement from survey control points; preserve
control points until after markings have been accepted.
F.
Apply uniformly painted markings of color(s), lengths, and widths as indicated on the drawings
true, sharp edges and ends.
1. Apply paint in one coat only.
2. Wet Film Thickness: 0.015 inch, minimum.
3. Width Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/8 inch.
G.
Parking Lots: Apply parking space lines, entrance and exit arrows, painted curbs, and other
markings indicated on drawings.
1. Mark the International Handicapped Symbol at indicated parking spaces.
2. Hand application by pneumatic spray is acceptable.
H.
Symbols: Use a suitable template that will provide a pavement marking with true, sharp edges
and ends, of the design and size indicated.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
321723.13 - 2
PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 321726
TACTILE WARNING SURFACING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Plastic tactile and detectable warning tiles for pedestrian walking surfaces.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and
Facilities; Final Rule; current edition (ADAAG).
B.
49 CFR 27, 37, and 38 - Standards for Accessible Transportation Facilities, Final Rule;
Department of Transportation; current edition.
C.
ATBCB PROWAG - Proposed Accessibility Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public
Right-of-Way; 2011.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TACTILE AND DETECTABLE WARNING TILES
A.
Plastic Tactile and Detectable Warning Tiles: ADAAG compliant, glass fiber and carbon fiber
reinforced, exterior grade, matte finish polyester sheet with truncated dome pattern, solid color
throughout, internal reinforcing of sheet and of truncated domes, integral radius cut lines on
back face of tile; with factory applied removable protective sheeting.
1. Shape: Rectangular.
2. Dimensions: 24 inches by 48 inches.
3. Pattern: In-line pattern of truncated domes complying with ADAAG.
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: Provide single component polyurethane or polyether structural adhesive; approved
my tile manufacturer.
B.
Sealant: Provide urethane elastomeric or polyether structural sealant; approved by tile
manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Do not install damaged, warped, bowed, dented, abraded, or otherwise defective units.
2. Do not install when ambient or substrate temperature has been below 40 degrees F during
the preceding 8 daylight hours.
B.
Field Adjustment:
1. Locate relative to curb line in compliance with PROWAG, Sections 304 and 305.
2. Orient so dome pattern is aligned with the direction of ramp.
C.
Install units fully seated to substrate, square to straight edges and flat to required slope.
3.02 INSTALLATION, SURFACE APPLIED PLASTIC TILES
A.
Cure concrete surfaces for a minimum of 4 days before installing units.
B.
Mechanically roughen surface as required to remove contaminants and prepare surface for
adhesive and sealant application.
C.
Drill fastener holes straight, true and to depth recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Apply adhesive to back of unit as recommended by manufacturer.
E.
Mechanically fasten to substrate. Avoid striking or damaging the unit itself during installation.
F.
Apply sealant to edges in cove profile.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
321726 - 1
TACTILE WARNING SURFACING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 328423
UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, and accessories.
B.
Control system.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312316 - Excavation: Excavating for irrigation piping.
B.
Section 312323 - Fill: Backfilling for irrigation piping.
C.
Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less).
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe
(SDR Series); 2009.
B.
ASTM D2282 - Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe
(SDR-PR); 1999 (Reapproved 2005).
C.
ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)
Plastic Piping Systems; 2004 (Reapproved 2009).
D.
NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical
Manufacturers Association; 2008.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate piping layout to water source, location of sleeves under pavement,
location and coverage of sprinkler heads, components, plant and landscaping features, site
structures, schedule of fittings to be used.
C.
Product Data: Provide component and control system and wiring diagrams.
D.
Record Documents: Record actual locations of all concealed components piping system.
E.
Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls, seasonal
activation and shutdown, and manufacturer's parts catalog.
2. Provide schedule indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide a
determined amount of water.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
minimum three years of experience.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements.
1.07 COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the work with site backfilling, landscape grading and delivery of plant life.
A.
Installer's Field Services: Prepare and start systems under provisions of Section 017000.
B.
Provide one complete spring start-up and a fall shutdown.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A.
Manufacturers:
1. Rain Bird Sales, Inc: www.rainbird.com.
2. Substitutions not permitted
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
328423 - 1
UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
2.02 PIPE MATERIALS
A.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D2241; 200 psi pressure rated upstream from controls, 160 psi downstream;
solvent welded sockets.
B.
ABS Pipe: ASTM D2282; 160 psi pressure rated upstream from controls, 100 psi downstream;
solvent-weld sockets.
C.
Fittings: Type and style of connection to match pipe.
D.
Pipe Risers at Valves: 160 psi PVC pipe.
E.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564 for PVC pipe and fittings.
F.
Sleeve Material: PVC.
2.03 OUTLETS
A.
Outlets: Brass construction.
B.
Rotary Type Sprinkler Head: Fixed type with screens; fully adjustable for flow and pressure;
size as indicated; with letter or symbol designating degree of arc and arrow indicating center of
spray pattern.
C.
Spray Type Sprinkler Head: Pop-Up head with half circle pattern.
D.
Emitter: Adjustable outlet, non-clogging, with two trickle tubes.
E.
Bubbler: Adjustable outlet and ________________.
F.
Quick Coupler: ________________.
2.04 VALVES
A.
Gate Valves: Bronze construction non-rising stem.
B.
Backflow Preventers: Iron body construction, double check valve type.
2.05 CONTROLS
A.
Controller: Automatic controller, microprocessor solid state control with visible readout display,
temporary override feature to bypass cycle for inclement weather, timer for a 4 station system,
programmable for 7 days in quarter hour increments, with automatic start and shutdown.
B.
Controller Housing: NEMA 250 Type 3; weatherproof, watertight, with lockable access door.
C.
Valves: Electric Solenoid; normally open; wiring, including required fittings and accessories.
D.
Wire Conductors: Color coded.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A.
Piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Route piping to avoid plants, ground cover, and
structures.
B.
Layout and stake locations of system components.
C.
Review layout requirements with other affected work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under
paving to accommodate system.
3.02 TRENCHING
A.
Trench and backfill in accordance with Section 312316 and Section 312323.
B.
Trench to accommodate grade changes and slope to drains.
C.
Maintain trenches free of debris, material, or obstructions that may damage pipe.
3.03 INSTALLATION
A.
Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Connect to utilities.
C.
Set outlets and box covers at finish grade elevations.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
328423 - 2
UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
D.
For Construction
09-24-13
Provide for thermal movement of components in system.
E.
Use threaded nipples for risers to each outlet.
F.
Install control wiring in accordance with Section 260519. Provide 10 inch expansion coil at each
valve to which controls are connected, and at 100 ft intervals. Bury wiring beside pipe.
G.
Mark valves with neoprene valve markers containing locking device. Set valve markers in pipe
risers extending from top of valve to finish grade.
H.
After piping is installed, but before outlets are installed and backfilling commences, open valves
and flush system with full head of water.
3.04 BACKFILLING
A.
Provide 3 inch sand cover over piping.
B.
Backfill trench and compact to specified subgrade elevation. Protect piping from displacement.
3.05 SYSTEM STARTUP
A.
Prepare and start system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Adjust control system to achieve time cycles required.
C.
Adjust head types for full water coverage as directed.
3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES
A.
Instruct FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises's personnel in operation and maintenance of
system, including adjusting of sprinkler heads. Use operation and maintenance data as basis
for demonstration.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
328423 - 3
UNDERGROUND SPRINKLERS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 329223
SODDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Fertilizing.
B.
Sod installation.
C.
Maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312200 - Grading: Topsoil material.
B.
Section 312200 - Grading: Preparation of subsoil and placement of topsoil in preparation for the
work of this section.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
TPI (SPEC) - Guideline Specifications to Turfgrass Sodding; Turfgrass Producers International;
2006.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Certification: Submit certification of grass species and location of sod source.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Sod Producer: Company specializing in sod production and harvesting with minimum five years
experience, and certified by the State of ________.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company approved by the sod producer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver sod on pallets. Protect exposed roots from dehydration.
B.
Do not deliver more sod than can be laid within 24 hours.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Sod: TPI, Certified Turfgrass Sod quality; cultivated grass sod; type indicated in plant schedule
on Drawings; with strong fibrous root system, free of stones, burned or bare spots; containing
no more than 5 weeds per 1000 sq ft. Minimum age of 18 months, with root development that
will support its own weight without tearing, when suspended vertically by holding the upper two
corners.
B.
Fertilizer: granular type; recommended for grass, with fifty percent of the elements derived from
organic sources; of proportion necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated by
analysis.
C.
Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of
grass.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that prepared soil base is ready to receive the work of this section.
3.02 FERTILIZING
A.
Apply fertilizer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Apply after smooth raking of topsoil and prior to installation of sod.
C.
Apply fertilizer no more than 48 hours before laying sod.
D.
Mix thoroughly into upper 2 inches of topsoil.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
329223 - 1
SODDING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
E.
For Construction
09-24-13
Lightly water to aid the dissipation of fertilizer.
3.03 LAYING SOD
A.
Moisten prepared surface immediately prior to laying sod.
B.
Lay sod immediately after delivery to site to prevent deterioration.
C.
Lay sod smooth and tight with no open joints visible, and no overlapping; stagger end joints 12
inches minimum. Do not stretch or overlap sod pieces.
D.
Where new sod adjoins existing grass areas, align top surfaces.
E.
Where sod is placed adjacent to hard surfaces, such as curbs, pavements, etc., place top
elevation of sod 1/2 inch below top of hard surface.
F.
Water sodded areas immediately after installation. Saturate sod to 4 inches of soil.
G.
After sod and soil have dried, roll sodded areas to ensure good bond between sod and soil and
to remove minor depressions and irregularities.
3.04 MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide maintenance at no extra cost to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises until turned
over to Owner for substantial completion with irrigation fully operational; FT 1463 Ltd, /
Williamsburg Enterprises will not pay for water prior to substantial completion.
B.
Maintain sodded areas immediately after placement until grass is well established and exhibits a
vigorous growing condition.
C.
Mow grass at regular intervals to maintain at a maximum height of 2-1/2 inches. Do not cut
more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing.
D.
Neatly trim edges and hand clip where necessary.
E.
Immediately remove clippings after mowing and trimming.
F.
Water to prevent grass and soil from drying out.
G.
Roll surface to remove irregularities.
H.
Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Remedy damage resulting from improper use of herbicides.
I.
Immediately replace sod to areas that show deterioration or bare spots.
J.
Protect sodded areas with warning signs during maintenance period.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
329223 - 2
SODDING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 329300
PLANTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Preparation of subsoil.
B.
Topsoil bedding.
C.
New plants and ground cover.
D.
Mulch and Fertilizer.
E.
Maintenance.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312200 - Grading: Topsoil material.
1.03 DEFINITIONS
A.
Weeds: Include Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass,
Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison
Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge,
Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, and Brome Grass.
B.
Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section, and described in ANSI
Z60.1.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI/ANLA Z60.1 - American Standard for Nursery Stock; 2004.
1.05 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Maintenance Data: Include cutting and trimming method; types, application frequency, and
recommended coverage of fertilizer .
C.
Submit list of plant life sources.
D.
Maintenance Contract.
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Nursery Qualifications: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants with three
years documented experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing and planting the plants with three
years experience.
1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Protect and maintain plant life until planted.
B.
Deliver plant life materials immediately prior to placement. Keep plants moist.
1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop below 35 degrees F or rise above
90 degrees F.
B.
Do not install plant life when wind velocity exceeds 30 mph.
1.09 WARRANTY
A.
See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.
B.
Warranty: Include coverage for one continuous growing season; replace dead or unhealthy
plants.
C.
Replacements: Plants of same size and species as specified, planted in the next growing
season, with a new warranty commencing on date of replacement.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
329300 - 1
PLANTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
A.
For Construction
09-24-13
Maintain plant life for one month after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PLANTS
A.
Plants: Species and size identified in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to
those in locality of the work.
B.
Plants and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in climatic
conditions similar to those in locality of the Work.
2.02 SOIL AMENDMENT MATERIALS
A.
Fertilizer: Containing fifty percent of the elements derived from organic sources; of proportion
necessary to eliminate any deficiencies of topsoil, as indicated in analysis..
B.
Peat Moss: Shredded, loose, sphagnum moss; free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic
materials; minimum of 85 percent organic material measured by oven dry weight, pH range of 4
to 5; moisture content of 30 percent.
C.
Water: Clean, fresh, and free of substances or matter that could inhibit vigorous growth of
plants.
2.03 MULCH MATERIALS
A.
Mulching Material: Pine species wood ground bark, free of growth or germination inhibiting
ingredients.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Wrapping Materials: Burlap.
B.
Stakes: Softwood lumber, pointed end.
C.
Cable, Wire, Eye Bolts and Turnbuckles: Non-corrosive, of sufficient strength to withstand wind
pressure and resulting movement of plant life.
D.
Plant Protectors: Rubber sleeves over cable to protect plant stems, trunks, and branches.
E.
Decorative Cover: Fir bark chips, 3/4 inch minimum and 3 inch maximum size.
2.05 TOP SOIL MIX
A.
A uniform mixture of 1 part peat and 3 parts topsoil by volume.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that prepared subsoil and planters are ready to receive work.
B.
Saturate soil with water to test drainage.
3.02 PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL
A.
Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in
grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas.
B.
Remove foreign materials, weeds and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove
contaminated subsoil.
C.
Scarify subsoil to a depth of 3 inches where plants are to be placed. Repeat cultivation in areas
where equipment, used for hauling and spreading topsoil, has compacted subsoil.
D.
Dig pits and beds 6 inches larger than plant root system.
3.03 PLACING TOPSOIL
A.
Spread topsoil to a minimum depth of 4 inches over area to be planted. Rake smooth.
B.
Place topsoil during dry weather and on dry unfrozen subgrade.
C.
Remove vegetable matter and foreign non-organic material from topsoil while spreading.
D.
Grade topsoil to eliminate rough, low or soft areas, and to ensure positive drainage.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
329300 - 2
PLANTS
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
E.
For Construction
09-24-13
Install topsoil into pits and beds intended for plant root balls, to a minimum thickness of 6
inches.
3.04 PLANTING
A.
Place plants for best appearance.
B.
Set plants vertical.
C.
Remove non-biodegradable root containers.
D.
Set plants in pits or beds, partly filled with prepared plant mix, at a minimum depth of 6 inches
under each plant. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires, from the root ball.
E.
Place bare root plant materials so roots lie in a natural position. Backfill soil mixture in 6 inch
layers. Maintain plant life in vertical position.
F.
Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of topsoil and again when full.
3.05 PLANT SUPPORT
A.
Brace plants vertically with plant protector wrapped guy wires and stakes to the following:
1. Tree Caliper: up to 1"; Tree Support Method: 1 stake with one tie
2. Tree Caliper: 2" to 4"; Tree Support Method: 2 stakes with two ties
3. Tree Caliper: 3" and higher; Tree Support Method: 3 guy wires with eye bolts and turn
buckles
4. Tree Caliper: Over 4 inches; Tree Support Method: 4 guy wires with eye bolts and turn
buckles
3.06 MAINTENANCE
A.
Provide maintenance at no extra cost to FT 1463 Ltd, / Williamsburg Enterprises; FT 1463 Ltd, /
Williamsburg Enterprises will pay for water.
B.
Irrigate sufficiently to saturate root system and prevent soil from drying out.
C.
Remove dead or broken branches and treat pruned areas or other wounds.
D.
Neatly trim plants where necessary.
E.
Immediately remove clippings after trimming.
F.
Control growth of weeds. Apply herbicides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
G.
Control insect damage and disease. Apply pesticides in accordance with manufacturers
instructions.
H.
Remedy damage from use of herbicides and pesticides.
I.
Replace mulch when deteriorated.
J.
Maintain wrappings, guys, turnbuckles, and stakes. Adjust turnbuckles to keep guy wires tight.
Repair or replace accessories when required.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
329300 - 3
PLANTS
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 330513
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Monolithic concrete manholes with masonry transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and
accessories.
B.
Modular precast concrete manhole sections with tongue-and-groove joints with masonry
transition to lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A48/A48M - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings; 2003 (Reapproved 2008).
B.
ASTM C478 - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections; 2012.
C.
ASTM C478M - Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections
[Metric]; 2012.
D.
ASTM C923 - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals; 2008.
E.
ASTM C923M - Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete
Manhole Structures, Pipes, and Laterals [Metric]; 2008b.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Manhole Sections: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C478 (ASTM
C478M), with resilient connectors complying with ASTM C923 (ASTM C923M).
B.
Concrete: As specified in Section 033000.
C.
Concrete Reinforcement: As specified in Section 033000.
2.02 COMPONENTS
A.
Lid and Frame: ASTM A48/A48M, Class 30B Cast iron construction, machined flat bearing
surface, removable lockable lid, closed lid design; live load rating of ____ psf; sealing gasket; lid
molded with identifying name ;. Provide ________ manufactured by ____________.
2.03 CONFIGURATION
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MANHOLES
A.
Place concrete base pad, trowel top surface level.
B.
Place manhole sections plumb and level, trim to correct elevations, anchor to base pad.
C.
Form and place manhole cylinder plumb and level, to correct dimensions and elevations. As
work progresses, build in fabricated metal items.
D.
Cut and fit for pipe.
E.
Grout base of shaft sections to achieve slope to exit piping. Trowel smooth. Contour as
required.
F.
Set cover frames and covers level without tipping, to correct elevations.
G.
Coordinate with other sections of work to provide correct size, shape, and location.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
330513 - 1
MANHOLES AND STRUCTURES
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 331116
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe and fittings for site water lines including domestic water lines and fire water lines.
B.
Valves, Fire hydrants, and Domestic water hydrants.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312316 - Excavation: Excavating of trenches.
B.
Section 312323 - Fill: Bedding and backfilling.
C.
Section 330513 - Manholes and Structures.
D.
Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete for thrust restraints.
E.
Section 099000 - Painting and Coating.
1.03 REFERENCES
A.
ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of
Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).
B.
ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; The
American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012.
C.
ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009.
D.
ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120; 2012.
E.
ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings,
Schedule 40; 2006.
F.
ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)
(PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).
G.
AWS A5.8/A5.8M - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding; American
Welding Society; 2011 and errata.
H.
AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water
Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5).
I.
AWWA C111/A21.11 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings;
American Water Works Association; 2012 (ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11).
J.
AWWA C151/A21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast; American Water Works
Association; 2009 (ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51).
K.
AWWA C502 - Dry Barrel Fire Hydrants; American Water Works Association; 2005
(ANSI/AWWA C502/C502a).
L.
AWWA C504 - Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves, 3 In. (75 mm) Through 72 In. (1,800 mm);
American Water Works Association; 2010.
M. AWWA C600 - Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances; American
Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C600).
N.
UL 246 - Hydrants for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER PIPE
A.
Manufacturers:
B.
Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151:
1. Fittings: Ductile iron, standard thickness.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
331116 - 1
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
2.
3.
For Construction
09-24-13
Joints: AWWA C111, rubber gasket with rods.
Jackets: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket.
C.
Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K, annealed:
1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper, or ASME B16.22, wrought copper.
2. Joints: Compression connection or AWS A5.8, BCuP silver braze.
D.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40.
1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC.
2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld.
E.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Water
Service " in large letters.
2.02 VALVES
A.
Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
B.
Gate Valves Up To 3 Inches:
1. Brass or Bronze body, non-rising stem, inside screw, single wedge or disc, compression
ends, with control rod, post indicator, valve key, and extension box.
C.
Ball Valves Up To 2 Inches:
1. Brass body, teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for
control rod, AWWA inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with
control rod, valve key, and extension box.
D.
Butterfly Valves From 2 Inches to 24 Inches:
1. AWWA C504, iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, ten
position lever handle.
2.03 HYDRANTS
A.
Hydrants: AWWA C502, UL 246, dry barrel type.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A.
Concrete for Thrust Restraints: Concrete type specified in Section 033000.
B.
Backflow Preventer: per plans.
C.
Meter: per plans.
D.
Manhole and Cover: Refer to Section 330513.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
A.
See the sections on excavation and fill for additional requirements.
B.
See Section 312316.13 for additional requirements.
C.
Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A.
Install ductile iron piping and fittings to AWWA C600.
B.
Route pipe in straight line.
C.
Install pipe to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
D.
Slope water pipe and position drains at low points.
3.03 INSTALLATION - VALVES AND HYDRANTS
A.
Set valves on solid bearing.
B.
Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished grade.
C.
Set hydrants plumb; locate pumper nozzle perpendicular to and facing roadway.
D.
Set hydrants to grade, with nozzles at least 20 inches above ground.
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
331116 - 2
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
E.
Locate control valve 4 inches away from hydrant.
F.
Provide a drainage pit 36 inches square by 24 inches deep filled with 2 inches washed gravel.
Encase elbow of hydrant in gravel to 6 inches above drain opening. Do not connect drain
opening to sewer.
G.
Paint hydrants in accordance with Section 099000.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
331116 - 3
SITE WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 331300
DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Disinfection of building domestic water piping specified in Section 221005.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
AWWA B300 - Hypochlorites; American Water Works Association; 2011 (ANSI/AWWA B300).
B.
AWWA B301 - Liquid Chlorine; American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA B301).
C.
AWWA B302 - Ammonium Sulfate; American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA
B302).
D.
AWWA B303 - Sodium Chlorite; American Water Works Association; 2010.
E.
AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005
(ANSI/AWWA C651).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements.
C.
Certificate: From authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water system.
D.
Certificate: Certify that cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
E.
Disinfection report:
1. Type and form of disinfectant used.
2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion.
3. Test locations.
4. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet
tested.
5. Date and time of flushing start and completion.
6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Firm: Company specializing in testing potable water systems, certified by governing
authorities of Texas.
1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Conform to applicable code or regulation for performing the work of this Section.
B.
Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of water
system.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 DISINFECTION CHEMICALS
A.
Chemicals: AWWA B300, Hypochlorite, AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine, AWWA B302,
Ammonium Sulfate, and AWWA B303, Sodium Chlorite.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DISINFECTION
A.
Use method prescribed by the applicable state or local codes, or health authority or water
purveyor having jurisdiction, or in the absence of any of these follow AWWA C651.
B.
Provide and attach equipment required to perform the work.
C.
Inject treatment disinfectant into piping system.
D.
Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
DISTRIBUTION
331300 - 1
DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
E.
Flush, circulate, and clean until required cleanliness is achieved; use municipal domestic water.
F.
Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
DISTRIBUTION
331300 - 2
DISINFECTING OF WATER UTILITY
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 333111
SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Sanitary sewerage drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
B.
Connection of building sanitary drainage system to municipal sewers.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009.
B.
ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120; 2012.
C.
ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2011.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A.
See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
B.
Product Data: Provide data indicating pipe, pipe accessories,and ________.
C.
Project Record Documents:
1. Record location of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Service type, inside nominal diameter of ____ inches, hub and
spigot end.
B.
Joint Seals for Cast Iron Pipe: ASTM C564 rubber gaskets.
C.
Plastic Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal
diameter of ____ inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.
D.
Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required
tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Sewer
Service " in large letters.
2.03 CLEANOUT MANHOLE
A.
Lid and Frame: Cast iron construction, hinged lid.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
A.
See Section 312316.13 for additional requirements.
B.
Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A.
Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
watertight.
1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D2321.
B.
Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of
1/8 inch in 10 feet.
C.
Connect to building sanitary sewer outlet, through installed sleeves.
D.
Install trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 312316.13.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
333111 - 1
SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
3.03 INSTALLATION - CLEANOUTS
A.
Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.
B.
Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end
sections.
C.
Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.
D.
Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.
3.04 PROTECTION
A.
Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
333111 - 2
SITE SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 334111
SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Storm drainage piping, fittings, and accessories.
B.
Connection of drainage system to municipal sewers.
C.
Catch basins, Plant area drains, Paved area drainage, Site surface drainage, Detention tank,
and Detention basin.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 312316.13 - Trenching: Excavating, bedding, and backfilling.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ASTM A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings; 2009.
B.
ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules
40, 80, and 120; 2012.
C.
ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications; 2011.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS
A.
Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Extra Heavy grade, inside nominal diameter of ____ inches,
hub and spigot end.
B.
Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices.
C.
Plastic Pipe: ASTM D1785, Schedule 40, Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) material; inside nominal
diameter of ____ inches, bell and spigot style solvent sealed joint end.
2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES
A.
Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve,
neoprene ribbed gasket for positive seal.
B.
Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required
tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps and other configurations required.
C.
Filter Fabric: Non-biodegradable, woven, ________. Provide ________ manufactured by
________.
D.
Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, clear plastic covering, imprinted with "Storm Sewer
Service " in large letters.
2.03 CATCH BASIN, TRENCH DRAIN, CLEANOUT, AND AREA DRAIN COMPONENTS
A.
Lids and Drain Covers: Cast iron, hinged to cast iron frame.
1. Catch Basin:
a. Lid Design: Linear grill.
2. Cleanout:
a. Lid Design: Linear grill.
3. Area Drain:
a. Lid Design: Linear grill.
2.04 BEDDING AND COVER MATERIALS
A.
Bedding: As specified in Section 312316.13.
B.
Cover: As specified in Section 312316.13.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
334111 - 1
SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
A.
See Section 312316.13 for additional requirements.
B.
Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPE
A.
Install pipe, fittings, and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Seal
watertight.
1. Plastic Pipe: Also comply with ASTM D2321.
B.
Lay pipe to slope gradients noted on layout drawings; with maximum variation from true slope of
1/8 inch in 10 feet.
C.
Connect to building storm drainage system, foundation drainage system, and utility/municipal
sewer system.
D.
Install continuous trace wire 6 inches above top of pipe; coordinate with Section 312316.13.
3.03 INSTALLATION - CATCH BASINS, TRENCH DRAINS AND CLEANOUTS
A.
Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation.
B.
Form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe end
sections.
C.
Establish elevations and pipe inverts for inlets and outlets as indicated.
D.
Mount lid and frame level in grout, secured to top cone section to elevation indicated.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 014000.
3.05 PROTECTION
A.
Protect pipe and bedding cover from damage or displacement until backfilling operation is in
progress.
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
334111 - 2
SITE STORM UTILITY DRAINAGE PIPING
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 335111
SITE NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Pipe and fittings for natural gas distribution on site outside buildings.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
A.
See Section 012200 - Unit Prices, for additional unit price requirements.
B.
Pipe and Fittings: By the linear foot. Includes hand trimming excavation, bedding, pipe and
fittings, connection to building service piping and to utility gas source.
C.
Gas Cocks: By the unit. Includes pressure regulating valve, fittings and accessories.
1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PIPE
A.
Manufacturers: RE: Plans & coordinate with utility provider.
2.02 GAS COCKS AND VALVES
A.
Gas Cock and Pressure Regulating Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked
on valve body.
B.
Gas Cocks Up to 2 Inches: 150 psig WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated,
Teflon packing, threaded ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key.
C.
Pressure Regulating Valves: Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure
regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch and
smaller, flanged ends larger than 2 inch.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 TRENCHING
A.
See Section 312316.13 for additional requirements.
B.
Backfill around sides and to top of pipe with cover fill, tamp in place and compact, then
complete backfilling.
3.02 INSTALLATION - PIPING
A.
Group piping with other site piping work whenever practical.
B.
Route piping in straight line.
C.
Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space.
D.
Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints.
E.
Install cocks and other fittings.
F.
Establish elevations of buried piping to ensure not less than 24 inches of cover in non-travelled
areas and 48 inches of cover in driveways and parking areas.
G.
Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface.
Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
335111 - 1
SITE NATURAL-GAS DISTRIBUTION
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 337119
ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Metal conduit.
B.
Nonmetallic duct.
C.
Manholes.
1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A.
Section 031000 - Concrete Forming and Accessories.
B.
Section 032000 - Concrete Reinforcing.
C.
Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.
B.
ASTM C858 - Standard Specification for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures;
2010e1.
C.
ASTM C891 - Standard Practice for Installation of Underground Precast Concrete Utility
Structures; 2011.
D.
NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers
Association; 2003.
E.
NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing;
National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2004.
F.
NEMA TC 6&8 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Utilities for Underground Installations; National
Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2003.
G.
UL 651A - Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit; Underwriters Laboratories
Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Ducts and Manholes:
2.02 CONDUIT AND DUCT
A.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B.
Rigid Plastic Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with fittings and conduit bodies to NEMA
TC 3.
C.
Rigid Plastic Underground Conduit: UL 651A, Type A PVC.
D.
Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6&8; PVC Type EB.
E.
Plastic Communications Duct and Fittings: NEMA TC 6&8, Type EB.
2.03 PRECAST CONCRETE MANHOLES
A.
Manufacturers:
B.
Description: Precast manhole designed in accordance with ASTM C858, comprising modular,
interlocking sections complete with accessories.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 DUCT BANK INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct with minimum slope of 4 inches per 100 feet (0.33 percent). Slope duct away from
building entrances.
B.
Cut duct square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends.
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
MANHOLES
337119 - 1
ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND
West Crossing Shell Building Construction
HVA 12108
For Construction
09-24-13
C.
Insert duct to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.
D.
Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between pull points.
E.
Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where required.
F.
Stagger duct joints vertically in concrete encasement 6 inches minimum.
G.
Use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4 feet on centers.
H.
Band ducts together before backfilling.
I.
Securely anchor duct to prevent movement during concrete placement.
J.
Place concrete under provisions of Section 033000. Use mineral pigment to color concrete red.
K.
Provide minimum 3 inch concrete cover at bottom, top, and sides of ductbank.
L.
Provide two No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in top of bank under paved areas.
M. Provide suitable pull string in each empty duct except sleeves and nipples.
N.
Swab duct. Use suitable caps to protect installed duct against entrance of dirt and moisture.
3.02 PRE-CAST MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A.
Install and seal precast sections in accordance with ASTM C891.
B.
Install manholes plumb.
C.
Use precast neck and shaft sections to bring manhole cover to finished elevation.
3.03 CAST-IN-PLACE MANHOLE INSTALLATION
A.
Formwork: Form inside and outside manhole surfaces in accordance with provisions of Section
031000.
B.
Reinforcing: Install reinforcing under the provisions of Section 032000.
C.
Concrete: Provide air-entrained, 2000 psi compressive strength at 28 days under the provisions
of Section 033000.
D.
Shape: Square.
E.
Base: Include 14 inch drain opening and two 1 inch ground rod openings. Slope to drain at
0.25 inch per foot (2 percent).
END OF SECTION
14550 Westheimer Road
Houston, Texas 77077
MANHOLES
337119 - 2
ELECTRICAL UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND
Willamsburg Retail 1
HVA 13063
For Construction
11-07-13
SECTION 337900
SITE GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Electrodes, connectors, and conductors.
B.
Treatment wells.
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
IEEE 142 - IEEE Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power
Systems; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2007.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A.
Rod Electrodes: Copper.
1. Diameter: 1/2 inch.
2. Length: 5 feet.
B.
Wire: Stranded copper.
1. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze.
C.
Grounding Boxes: Bronze.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify completion of filling and backfilling before beginning grounding work.
B.
Verify that trenching is completed before installing horizontal electrodes.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A.
Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
Install rod electrodes in vertical position with bottom at least 5 feet below frost line.
3.03 CHEMICAL TREATMENT
A.
Provide chemical treatment at each vertical electrode site.
B.
Use suitable ion-producing treating chemicals that are non-corrosive and non-toxic.
C.
Saturate treatment chemicals with water following application.
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 014000.
B.
Make final grounding system measurements three or four days after chemical treatment.
C.
Test Procedures: IEEE 142, fall of potential method.
END OF SECTION
2731 FM 1463 Road
Katy, Texas 77479
337900 - 1
SITE GROUNDING
November 07, 2013
BACK COVER